Imported Upstream version 1.3.2upstream/1.3.2

6 files changed, 12052 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/LGPL.texi b/doc/LGPL.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e371ac0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/LGPL.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,590 @@
+@c \input texinfo.tex    @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c 
+@c %**start of header
+
+@c All text is ignored before the setfilename.
+@setfilename LGPL.info
+
+@center GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@center Version 2.1, February 1999
+
+@sp 1
+
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA 
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
+license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.  It also counts
+as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the
+version number 2.1.]
+
+@sp 1
+@center Preamble
+@sp 1
+
+The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
+share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
+intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
+make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free
+Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.  You can use
+it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this
+license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to
+use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
+
+When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if
+you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in
+new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these
+things.
+
+To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
+rights.  These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
+you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
+
+For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or
+for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you.
+You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
+If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete
+object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
+library after making changes to the library and recompiling it.  And you
+must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
+library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is
+no warranty for the free library.  Also, if the library is modified by
+someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they
+have is not the original version, so that the original author's
+reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by
+others.
+
+Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any
+free program.  We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively
+restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license
+from a patent holder.  Therefore, we insist that any patent license
+obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
+freedom of use specified in this license.
+
+Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License.  This license, the GNU Lesser General Public
+License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different
+from the ordinary General Public License.  We use this license for
+certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into
+non-free programs.
+
+When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a
+shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
+combined work, a derivative of the original library.  The ordinary
+General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
+combination fits its criteria of freedom.  The Lesser General Public
+License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
+library.
+
+We call this license the ``Lesser'' General Public License because it does
+Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public
+License.  It also provides other free software developers Less of an
+advantage over competing non-free programs.  These disadvantages are the
+reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
+However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special
+circumstances.
+
+For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage
+the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a
+de-facto standard.  To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed
+to use the library.  A more frequent case is that a free library does
+the same job as widely used non-free libraries.  In this case, there is
+little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
+use the Lesser General Public License.
+
+In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
+programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free
+software.  For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free
+programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system,
+as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
+
+Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
+users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked
+with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program
+using a modified version of the Library.
+
+The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.  Pay close attention to the difference between a
+``work based on the library'' and a ``work that uses the library''.  The
+former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
+be combined with the library in order to run.
+
+@page
+
+@center GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+@enumerate 0
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program
+which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other
+authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
+Lesser General Public License (also called ``this License'').  Each
+licensee is addressed as ``you''.
+
+A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work which
+has been distributed under these terms.  A ``work based on the Library''
+means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either
+verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
+another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without
+limitation in the term ``modification''.)
+
+``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
+modifications to it.  For a library, complete source code means all the
+source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
+definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
+installation of the library.
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of running
+a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
+program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
+it).  Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the
+program that uses the Library does.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices
+that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and
+distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it,
+thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such
+modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
+you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+@enumerate a
+
+@item
+The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating
+that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all
+third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of
+data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility,
+other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
+must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
+application does not supply such function or table, the facility still
+operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a
+purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.
+Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function
+or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does
+not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
+roots.)
+
+@end enumerate
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and
+can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
+the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
+License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
+whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a
+storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
+scope of this License.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.  To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
+they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License.  (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.)  Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that
+copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
+Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of
+it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
+of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the
+complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
+distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+customarily used for software interchange.
+
+If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a
+designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source
+code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
+source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
+source along with the object code.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but
+is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with
+it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''.  Such a work, in
+isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls
+outside the scope of this License.
+
+However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library creates
+an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains
+portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the library''.
+The executable is therefore covered by this License.  Section 6 states
+terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked
+without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.  The threshold
+for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
+layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten
+lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
+unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
+(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
+will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether
+or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a
+``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a work
+containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms
+of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work
+for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such
+modifications.
+
+You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License.  You must supply a copy of this License.  If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License.  Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+@enumerate a
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
+work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if
+the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
+machine-readable ``work that uses the Library'', as object code and/or
+source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to
+produce a modified executable containing the modified Library.  (It is
+understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files
+in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+to use the modified definitions.)
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library.  A
+suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the
+library already present on the user's computer system, rather than
+copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
+properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs
+one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the
+version that the work was made with.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years,
+to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above,
+for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
+designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
+materials from the same place.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or
+that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the Library''
+must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the
+executable from it.  However, as a special exception, the materials to
+be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed
+(in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
+kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
+unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
+
+It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions
+of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the
+operating system.  Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them
+and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library
+side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities
+not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library,
+provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library
+and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided
+that you do these two things:
+
+@enumerate a
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
+Library, uncombined with any other library facilities.  This must be
+distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of
+it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
+accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the
+Library except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the
+Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
+License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you
+under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
+such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed
+it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
+the Library or its derivative works.  These actions are prohibited by
+law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or
+distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you
+indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and
+conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works
+based on it.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with
+this License.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all.  For example, if a patent license
+would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those
+who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way
+you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
+from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented
+by public license practices.  Many people have made generous
+contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that
+system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to
+the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
+software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
+choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be
+a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain
+countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
+copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an
+explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the Lesser General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions
+will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
+detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
+later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation.  If the Library does not specify a license
+version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
+Software Foundation.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs
+whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the
+author to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the
+Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
+sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the
+two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
+software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+@sp 1
+@center NO WARRANTY
+@sp 1
+
+@item
+BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
+THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE LIBRARY ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
+EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE
+ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
+YOU.  SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
+NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+@sp 1
+@item
+IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
+DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY
+(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
+INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
+THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
+OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+@sp 1
+@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@sp 1
+@page
+@center How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change.  You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of
+the ordinary General Public License).
+
+To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.  It
+is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
+effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have
+at least the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is
+found.
+
+@format
+@t{
+<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+Lesser General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307  USA
+}
+@end format
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+@format
+@t{
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+}
+@end format
+
+That's all there is to it!
+
+@c @bye
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a4383e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+
+info_TEXINFOS = libconfig.texi
+libconfig_TEXINFOS = LGPL.texi
+
+html:
+	$(MAKEINFO) --html --no-split $(info_TEXINFOS)
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.in b/doc/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..108f5b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,587 @@
+# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.10.1 from Makefile.am.
+# @configure_input@
+
+# Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
+# 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
+# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+@SET_MAKE@
+VPATH = @srcdir@
+pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
+pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
+pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
+am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
+install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
+install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
+install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
+INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
+transform = $(program_transform_name)
+NORMAL_INSTALL = :
+PRE_INSTALL = :
+POST_INSTALL = :
+NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
+PRE_UNINSTALL = :
+POST_UNINSTALL = :
+build_triplet = @build@
+host_triplet = @host@
+target_triplet = @target@
+subdir = doc
+DIST_COMMON = $(libconfig_TEXINFOS) $(srcdir)/Makefile.am \
+	$(srcdir)/Makefile.in texinfo.tex
+ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4
+am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac
+am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \
+	$(ACLOCAL_M4)
+mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs
+CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/ac_config.h
+CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES =
+SOURCES =
+DIST_SOURCES =
+INFO_DEPS = $(srcdir)/libconfig.info
+am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(srcdir)
+DVIS = libconfig.dvi
+PDFS = libconfig.pdf
+PSS = libconfig.ps
+HTMLS = libconfig.html
+TEXINFOS = libconfig.texi
+TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
+TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch
+MAKEINFOHTML = $(MAKEINFO) --html
+AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS = $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS)
+DVIPS = dvips
+am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"
+am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`;
+am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \
+    $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+    *) f=$$p;; \
+  esac;
+am__strip_dir = `echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`;
+DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
+ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
+AMTAR = @AMTAR@
+AR = @AR@
+AS = @AS@
+AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
+AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
+AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
+AWK = @AWK@
+CC = @CC@
+CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
+CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
+CPP = @CPP@
+CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
+CXX = @CXX@
+CXXCPP = @CXXCPP@
+CXXDEPMODE = @CXXDEPMODE@
+CXXFLAGS = @CXXFLAGS@
+CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
+DEFS = @DEFS@
+DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
+DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@
+DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@
+ECHO = @ECHO@
+ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
+ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
+ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
+EGREP = @EGREP@
+EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
+F77 = @F77@
+FFLAGS = @FFLAGS@
+GREP = @GREP@
+INSTALL = @INSTALL@
+INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
+INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
+INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
+INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
+LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
+LEX = @LEX@
+LEXLIB = @LEXLIB@
+LEX_OUTPUT_ROOT = @LEX_OUTPUT_ROOT@
+LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@
+LIBS = @LIBS@
+LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@
+LN_S = @LN_S@
+LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
+MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@
+MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@
+NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@
+OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@
+OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
+PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
+PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
+PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
+PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
+PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
+PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
+PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
+RANLIB = @RANLIB@
+SED = @SED@
+SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
+SHELL = @SHELL@
+STRIP = @STRIP@
+VERSION = @VERSION@
+YACC = @YACC@
+YFLAGS = @YFLAGS@
+abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@
+abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@
+abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@
+abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@
+ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
+ac_ct_CXX = @ac_ct_CXX@
+ac_ct_F77 = @ac_ct_F77@
+am__include = @am__include@
+am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@
+am__quote = @am__quote@
+am__tar = @am__tar@
+am__untar = @am__untar@
+bindir = @bindir@
+build = @build@
+build_alias = @build_alias@
+build_cpu = @build_cpu@
+build_os = @build_os@
+build_vendor = @build_vendor@
+builddir = @builddir@
+datadir = @datadir@
+datarootdir = @datarootdir@
+docdir = @docdir@
+dvidir = @dvidir@
+exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
+host = @host@
+host_alias = @host_alias@
+host_cpu = @host_cpu@
+host_os = @host_os@
+host_vendor = @host_vendor@
+htmldir = @htmldir@
+includedir = @includedir@
+infodir = @infodir@
+install_sh = @install_sh@
+libdir = @libdir@
+libexecdir = @libexecdir@
+localedir = @localedir@
+localstatedir = @localstatedir@
+mandir = @mandir@
+mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@
+oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
+pdfdir = @pdfdir@
+prefix = @prefix@
+program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
+psdir = @psdir@
+sbindir = @sbindir@
+sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
+target = @target@
+target_alias = @target_alias@
+target_cpu = @target_cpu@
+target_os = @target_os@
+target_vendor = @target_vendor@
+top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@
+top_builddir = @top_builddir@
+top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
+info_TEXINFOS = libconfig.texi
+libconfig_TEXINFOS = LGPL.texi
+all: all-am
+
+.SUFFIXES:
+.SUFFIXES: .dvi .html .info .pdf .ps .texi
+$(srcdir)/Makefile.in:  $(srcdir)/Makefile.am  $(am__configure_deps)
+	@for dep in $?; do \
+	  case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \
+	    *$$dep*) \
+	      cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh \
+		&& exit 0; \
+	      exit 1;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu  doc/Makefile'; \
+	cd $(top_srcdir) && \
+	  $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu  doc/Makefile
+.PRECIOUS: Makefile
+Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
+	@case '$?' in \
+	  *config.status*) \
+	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \
+	  *) \
+	    echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \
+	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \
+	esac;
+
+$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+
+$(top_srcdir)/configure:  $(am__configure_deps)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+$(ACLOCAL_M4):  $(am__aclocal_m4_deps)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+
+mostlyclean-libtool:
+	-rm -f *.lo
+
+clean-libtool:
+	-rm -rf .libs _libs
+
+.texi.info:
+	restore=: && backupdir="$(am__leading_dot)am$$$$" && \
+	am__cwd=`pwd` && cd $(srcdir) && \
+	rm -rf $$backupdir && mkdir $$backupdir && \
+	if ($(MAKEINFO) --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  for f in $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9][0-9]; do \
+	    if test -f $$f; then mv $$f $$backupdir; restore=mv; else :; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	else :; fi && \
+	cd "$$am__cwd"; \
+	if $(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
+	 -o $@ $<; \
+	then \
+	  rc=0; \
+	  cd $(srcdir); \
+	else \
+	  rc=$$?; \
+	  cd $(srcdir) && \
+	  $$restore $$backupdir/* `echo "./$@" | sed 's|[^/]*$$||'`; \
+	fi; \
+	rm -rf $$backupdir; exit $$rc
+
+.texi.dvi:
+	TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2DVI) $<
+
+.texi.pdf:
+	TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2PDF) $<
+
+.texi.html:
+	rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp)
+	if $(MAKEINFOHTML) $(AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
+	 -o $(@:.html=.htp) $<; \
+	then \
+	  rm -rf $@; \
+	  if test ! -d $(@:.html=.htp) && test -d $(@:.html=); then \
+	    mv $(@:.html=) $@; else mv $(@:.html=.htp) $@; fi; \
+	else \
+	  if test ! -d $(@:.html=.htp) && test -d $(@:.html=); then \
+	    rm -rf $(@:.html=); else rm -Rf $(@:.html=.htp) $@; fi; \
+	  exit 1; \
+	fi
+$(srcdir)/libconfig.info: libconfig.texi $(libconfig_TEXINFOS)
+libconfig.dvi: libconfig.texi $(libconfig_TEXINFOS)
+libconfig.pdf: libconfig.texi $(libconfig_TEXINFOS)
+libconfig.html: libconfig.texi $(libconfig_TEXINFOS)
+.dvi.ps:
+	TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	$(DVIPS) -o $@ $<
+
+uninstall-dvi-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(DVIS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+uninstall-html-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(HTMLS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -rf '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -rf "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+uninstall-info-am:
+	@$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
+	@if test -d '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && \
+	    (install-info --version && \
+	     install-info --version 2>&1 | sed 1q | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	  for file in $$list; do \
+	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' --remove '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \
+	    install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" --remove "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
+	  done; \
+	else :; fi
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for file in $$list; do \
+	  relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	  relfile_i=`echo "$$relfile" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  (if test -d "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" && cd "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; then \
+	     echo " cd '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
+	     rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]; \
+	   else :; fi); \
+	done
+
+uninstall-pdf-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(PDFS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+uninstall-ps-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(PSS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
+	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for base in $$list; do \
+	  case $$base in \
+	    $(srcdir)/*) base=`echo "$$base" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  base_i=`echo "$$base" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  for file in $$d/$$base $$d/$$base-[0-9] $$d/$$base-[0-9][0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9][0-9]; do \
+	    if test -f $$file; then \
+	      relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
+	      test -f $(distdir)/$$relfile || \
+		cp -p $$file $(distdir)/$$relfile; \
+	    else :; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	done
+
+mostlyclean-aminfo:
+	-rm -rf libconfig.aux libconfig.cp libconfig.cps libconfig.fn libconfig.fns \
+	  libconfig.ky libconfig.kys libconfig.log libconfig.pg \
+	  libconfig.pgs libconfig.tmp libconfig.toc libconfig.tp \
+	  libconfig.tps libconfig.vr libconfig.vrs libconfig.dvi \
+	  libconfig.pdf libconfig.ps libconfig.html
+
+maintainer-clean-aminfo:
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \
+	  i_i=`echo "$$i" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  echo " rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
+	  rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]; \
+	done
+tags: TAGS
+TAGS:
+
+ctags: CTAGS
+CTAGS:
+
+
+distdir: $(DISTFILES)
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
+	topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
+	list='$(DISTFILES)'; \
+	  dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \
+	  sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \
+	      -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \
+	case $$dist_files in \
+	  */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \
+			   sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \
+			   sort -u` ;; \
+	esac; \
+	for file in $$dist_files; do \
+	  if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
+	    dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
+	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
+	      cp -pR $(srcdir)/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \
+	    fi; \
+	    cp -pR $$d/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \
+	  else \
+	    test -f $(distdir)/$$file \
+	    || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file \
+	    || exit 1; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \
+	  top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \
+	  dist-info
+check-am: all-am
+check: check-am
+all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS)
+installdirs:
+	for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; do \
+	  test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \
+	done
+install: install-am
+install-exec: install-exec-am
+install-data: install-data-am
+uninstall: uninstall-am
+
+install-am: all-am
+	@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
+
+installcheck: installcheck-am
+install-strip:
+	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
+	  install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
+	  `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \
+	    echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install
+mostlyclean-generic:
+
+clean-generic:
+
+distclean-generic:
+	-test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
+
+maintainer-clean-generic:
+	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
+	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
+clean: clean-am
+
+clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am
+
+distclean: distclean-am
+	-rm -f Makefile
+distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
+
+dvi: dvi-am
+
+dvi-am: $(DVIS)
+
+html-am: $(HTMLS)
+
+info: info-am
+
+info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+
+install-data-am: install-info-am
+
+install-dvi: install-dvi-am
+
+install-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	test -z "$(dvidir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)"
+	@list='$(DVIS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+install-exec-am:
+
+install-html: install-html-am
+
+install-html-am: $(HTMLS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	test -z "$(htmldir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)"
+	@list='$(HTMLS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p" || test -d "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  if test -d "$$d$$p"; then \
+	    echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	    $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit 1; \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p'/* '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p"/* "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
+	  else \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+install-info: install-info-am
+
+install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	test -z "$(infodir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
+	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for file in $$list; do \
+	  case $$file in \
+	    $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  file_i=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  for ifile in $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9] \
+                       $$d/$$file_i[0-9] $$d/$$file_i[0-9][0-9] ; do \
+	    if test -f $$ifile; then \
+	      relfile=`echo "$$ifile" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	      echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$ifile' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \
+	      $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$ifile" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
+	    else : ; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	done
+	@$(POST_INSTALL)
+	@if (install-info --version && \
+	     install-info --version 2>&1 | sed 1q | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	  for file in $$list; do \
+	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'";\
+	    install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || :;\
+	  done; \
+	else : ; fi
+install-man:
+
+install-pdf: install-pdf-am
+
+install-pdf-am: $(PDFS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	test -z "$(pdfdir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)"
+	@list='$(PDFS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+install-ps: install-ps-am
+
+install-ps-am: $(PSS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	test -z "$(psdir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)"
+	@list='$(PSS)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  f=$(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+installcheck-am:
+
+maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
+	-rm -f Makefile
+maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \
+	maintainer-clean-generic
+
+mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
+
+mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic \
+	mostlyclean-libtool
+
+pdf: pdf-am
+
+pdf-am: $(PDFS)
+
+ps: ps-am
+
+ps-am: $(PSS)
+
+uninstall-am: uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am \
+	uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
+
+.MAKE: install-am install-strip
+
+.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \
+	dist-info distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool \
+	distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am install \
+	install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \
+	install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \
+	install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \
+	install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps install-ps-am \
+	install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \
+	maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-aminfo \
+	maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-aminfo \
+	mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am ps ps-am \
+	uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am \
+	uninstall-info-am uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
+
+
+html:
+	$(MAKEINFO) --html --no-split $(info_TEXINFOS)
+# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
+# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
+.NOEXPORT:
diff --git a/doc/libconfig.info b/doc/libconfig.info
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51dbfc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/libconfig.info
@@ -0,0 +1,2182 @@
+This is libconfig.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.11 from
+libconfig.texi.
+
+INFO-DIR-SECTION Software libraries
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* libconfig: (libconfig).       A Library For Processing Structured Configuration Files
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Up: (dir)
+
+libconfig
+*********
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Introduction::
+* Configuration Files::
+* The C API::
+* The C++ API::
+* Configuration File Grammar::
+* License::
+* Function Index::
+* Type Index::
+* Concept Index::
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Configuration Files,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Why Another Configuration File Library?::
+* Using the Library from a C Program::
+* Using the Library from a C++ Program::
+* Multithreading Issues::
+* Internationalization Issues::
+* Compiling Using pkg-config::
+
+1 Introduction
+**************
+
+Libconfig is a library for reading, manipulating, and writing
+structured configuration files. The library features a fully reentrant
+parser and includes bindings for both the C and C++ programming
+languages.
+
+   The library runs on modern POSIX-compilant systems, such as Linux,
+Solaris, and Mac OS X (Darwin), as well as on Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
+and later (with either Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or later, or the
+GNU toolchain via the MinGW environment).
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Why Another Configuration File Library?,  Next: Using the Library from a C Program,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.1 Why Another Configuration File Library?
+===========================================
+
+There are several open-source configuration file libraries available as
+of this writing. This library was written because each of those
+libraries falls short in one or more ways. The main features of
+libconfig that set it apart from the other libraries are:
+
+   * A fully reentrant parser. Independent configurations can be parsed
+     in concurrent threads at the same time.
+
+   * Both C and C++ bindings, as well as hooks to allow for the
+     creation of wrappers in other languages.
+
+   * A simple, structured configuration file format that is more
+     readable and compact than XML and more flexible than the obsolete
+     but prevalent Windows "INI" file format.
+
+   * A low-footprint implementation (just 38K for the C library and 66K
+     for the C++ library) that is suitable for memory-constrained
+     systems.
+
+   * Proper documentation.
+
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Using the Library from a C Program,  Next: Using the Library from a C++ Program,  Prev: Why Another Configuration File Library?,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.2 Using the Library from a C Program
+======================================
+
+To use the library from C code, include the following preprocessor
+directive in your source files:
+
+
+     #include <libconfig.h>
+
+
+   To link with the library, specify `-lconfig' as an argument to the
+linker.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Using the Library from a C++ Program,  Next: Multithreading Issues,  Prev: Using the Library from a C Program,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.3 Using the Library from a C++ Program
+========================================
+
+To use the library from C++, include the following preprocessor
+directive in your source files:
+
+
+     #include <libconfig.h++>
+
+
+   Or, alternatively:
+
+
+     #include <libconfig.hh>
+
+
+   The C++ API classes are defined in the namespace `libconfig', hence
+the following statement may optionally be used:
+
+
+     using namespace libconfig;
+
+
+   To link with the library, specify `-lconfig++' as an argument to the
+linker.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Multithreading Issues,  Next: Internationalization Issues,  Prev: Using the Library from a C++ Program,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.4 Multithreading Issues
+=========================
+
+Libconfig is fully "reentrant"; the functions in the library do not
+make use of global variables and do not maintain state between
+successive calls. Therefore two independent configurations may be safely
+manipulated concurrently by two distinct threads.
+
+   Libconfig is not "thread-safe". The library is not aware of the
+presence of threads and knows nothing about the host system's threading
+model. Therefore, if an instance of a configuration is to be accessed
+from multiple threads, it must be suitably protected by synchronization
+mechanisms like read-write locks or mutexes; the standard rules for
+safe multithreaded access to shared data must be observed.
+
+   Libconfig is not "async-safe". Calls should not be made into the
+library from signal handlers, because some of the C library routines
+that it uses may not be async-safe.
+
+   Libconfig is not guaranteed to be "cancel-safe". Since it is not
+aware of the host system's threading model, the library does not
+contain any thread cancellation points. In most cases this will not be
+an issue for multithreaded programs. However, be aware that some of the
+routines in the library (namely those that read/write configurations
+from/to files or streams) perform I/O using C library routines which
+may potentially block; whether or not these C library routines are
+cancel-safe depends on the host system.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Internationalization Issues,  Next: Compiling Using pkg-config,  Prev: Multithreading Issues,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.5 Internationalization Issues
+===============================
+
+Libconfig does not natively support Unicode configuration files, but
+string values may contain Unicode text encoded in UTF-8; such strings
+will be treated as ordinary 8-bit ASCII text by the library. It is the
+responsibility of the calling program to perform the necessary
+conversions to/from wide (wchar_t) strings using the wide string
+conversion functions such as mbsrtowcs() and wcsrtombs() or the iconv()
+function of the libiconv library.
+
+   The textual representation of a floating point value varies by
+locale. However, the libconfig grammar specifies that floating point
+values are represented using a period (`.') as the radix symbol; this
+is consistent with the grammar of most programming languages. When a
+configuration is read in or written out, libconfig temporarily changes
+the LC_NUMERIC category of the locale of the calling thread to the "C"
+locale to ensure consistent handling of floating point values
+regardless of the locale(s) in use by the calling program.
+
+   Note that the MinGW environment does not (as of this writing) provide
+functions for changing the locale of the calling thread. Therefore,
+when using libconfig in that environment, the calling program is
+responsible for changing the LC_NUMERIC category of the locale to the
+"C" locale before reading or writing a configuration.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Compiling Using pkg-config,  Prev: Internationalization Issues,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.6 Compiling Using pkg-config
+==============================
+
+On UNIX systems you can use the pkg-config utility (version 0.20 or
+later) to automatically select the appropriate compiler and linker
+switches for libconfig. Ensure that the environment variable
+`PKG_CONFIG_PATH' contains the absolute path to the `lib/pkgconfig'
+subdirectory of the libconfig installation. Then, you can compile and
+link C programs with libconfig as follows:
+
+     gcc `pkg-config --cflags libconfig` myprogram.c -o myprogram \
+         `pkg-config --libs libconfig`
+
+
+   And similarly, for C++ programs:
+
+     g++ `pkg-config --cflags libconfig++` myprogram.cpp -o myprogram \
+         `pkg-config --libs libconfig++`
+
+
+   Note the backticks in the above examples.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Configuration Files,  Next: The C API,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Settings::
+* Groups::
+* Arrays::
+* Lists::
+* Integer Values::
+* 64-bit Integer Values::
+* Floating Point Values::
+* Boolean Values::
+* String Values::
+* Comments::
+
+2 Configuration Files
+*********************
+
+Libconfig supports structured, hierarchical configurations. These
+configurations can be read from and written to files and manipulated in
+memory.
+
+   A "configuration" consists of a group of "settings", which associate
+names with values. A "value" can be one of the following:
+
+   * A "scalar value": integer, 64-bit integer, floating-point number,
+     boolean, or string
+
+   * An "array", which is a sequence of scalar values, all of which
+     must have the same type
+
+   * A "group", which is a collection of settings
+
+   * A "list", which is a sequence of values of any type, including
+     other lists
+
+   Consider the following configuration file for a hypothetical GUI
+application, which illustrates all of the elements of the configuration
+file grammar.
+
+
+     # Example application configuration file
+
+     version = "1.0";
+
+     application:
+     {
+       window:
+       {
+         title = "My Application";
+         size = { w = 640; h = 480; };
+         pos = { x = 350; y = 250; };
+       };
+
+       list = ( ( "abc", 123, true ), 1.234, ( /* an empty list */) );
+
+       books = ( { title  = "Treasure Island";
+                   author = "Robert Louis Stevenson";
+                   price  = 29.95;
+                   qty    = 5; },
+                 { title  = "Snow Crash";
+                   author = "Neal Stephenson";
+                   price  = 9.99;
+                   qty    = 8; } );
+
+       misc:
+       {
+         pi = 3.141592654;
+         bigint = 9223372036854775807L;
+         columns = [ "Last Name", "First Name", "MI" ];
+         bitmask = 0x1FC3;
+       };
+     };
+
+
+   Settings can be uniquely identified within the configuration by a
+"path". The path is a dot-separated sequence of names, beginning at a
+top-level group and ending at the setting itself. Each name in the path
+is the name of a setting; if the setting has no name because it is an
+element in a list or array, an integer index in square brackets can be
+used as the name.
+
+   For example, in our hypothetical configuration file, the path to the
+`x' setting is `application.window.pos.x'; the path to the `version'
+setting is simply `version'; and the path to the `title' setting of the
+second book in the `books' list is `application.books.[1].title'.
+
+   The datatype of a value is determined from the format of the value
+itself. If the value is enclosed in double quotes, it is treated as a
+string. If it looks like an integer or floating point number, it is
+treated as such. If it is one of the values `TRUE', `true', `FALSE', or
+`false' (or any other mixed-case version of those tokens, e.g., `True'
+or `FaLsE'), it is treated as a boolean. If it consists of a
+comma-separated list of values enclosed in square brackets, it is
+treated as an array. And if it consists of a comma-separated list of
+values enclosed in parentheses, it is treated as a list. Any value
+which does not meet any of these criteria is considered invalid and
+results in a parse error.
+
+   All names are case-sensitive. They may consist only of alphanumeric
+characters, dashes (`-'), underscores (`_'), and asterisks (`*'), and
+must begin with a letter or asterisk. No other characters are allowed.
+
+   In C and C++, integer, 64-bit integer, floating point, and string
+values are mapped to the types `long', `long long', `double', and
+`const char *', respectively. The boolean type is mapped to `int' in C
+and `bool' in C++.
+
+   The following sections describe the elements of the configuration
+file grammar in additional detail.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Settings,  Next: Groups,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.1 Settings
+============
+
+A setting has the form:
+
+   name = value ;
+
+   or:
+
+   name : value ;
+
+   The trailing semicolon is required. Whitespace is not significant.
+
+   The value may be a scalar value, an array, a group, or a list.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Groups,  Next: Arrays,  Prev: Settings,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.2 Groups
+==========
+
+A group has the form:
+
+   {    settings ...  }
+
+   Groups can contain any number of settings, but each setting must have
+a unique name within the group.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Arrays,  Next: Lists,  Prev: Groups,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.3 Arrays
+==========
+
+An array has the form:
+
+   [ value, value ... ]
+
+   An array may have zero or more elements, but the elements must all be
+scalar values of the same type.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Lists,  Next: Integer Values,  Prev: Arrays,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.4 Lists
+=========
+
+A list has the form:
+
+   ( value, value ... )
+
+   A list may have zero or more elements, each of which can be a scalar
+value, an array, a group, or another list.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Integer Values,  Next: 64-bit Integer Values,  Prev: Lists,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.5 Integer Values
+==================
+
+Integers can be represented in one of two ways: as a series of one or
+more decimal digits (`0' - `9'), with an optional leading sign
+character (`+' or `-'); or as a hexadecimal value consisting of the
+characters `0x' followed by a series of one or more hexadecimal digits
+(`0' - `9', `A' - `F', `a' - `f').
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: 64-bit Integer Values,  Next: Floating Point Values,  Prev: Integer Values,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.6 64-bit Integer Values
+=========================
+
+Long long (64-bit) integers are represented identically to integers,
+except that an 'L' character is appended to indicate a 64-bit value.
+For example, `0L' indicates a 64-bit integer value 0.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Floating Point Values,  Next: Boolean Values,  Prev: 64-bit Integer Values,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.7 Floating Point Values
+=========================
+
+Floating point values consist of a series of one or more digits, one
+decimal point, an optional leading sign character (`+' or `-'), and an
+optional exponent. An exponent consists of the letter `E' or `e', an
+optional sign character, and a series of one or more digits.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Boolean Values,  Next: String Values,  Prev: Floating Point Values,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.8 Boolean Values
+==================
+
+Boolean values may have one of the following values: `true', `false',
+or any mixed-case variation thereof.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: String Values,  Next: Comments,  Prev: Boolean Values,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.9 String Values
+=================
+
+String values consist of arbitrary text delimited by double quotes.
+Literal double quotes can be escaped by preceding them with a
+backslash: `\"'. The escape sequences `\\', `\f', `\n', `\r', and `\t'
+are also recognized, and have the usual meaning. No other escape
+sequences are currently supported.
+
+   Adjacent strings are automatically concatenated, as in C/C++ source
+code. This is useful for formatting very long strings as sequences of
+shorter strings. For example, the following constructs are equivalent:
+
+   * `"The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog."'
+
+   * `"The quick brown fox"'
+     `" jumped over the lazy dog."'
+
+   * `"The quick" /* comment */ " brown fox " // another comment'
+     `"jumped over the lazy dog."'
+
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Comments,  Prev: String Values,  Up: Configuration Files
+
+2.10 Comments
+=============
+
+Three types of comments are allowed within a configuration:
+
+   * Script-style comments. All text beginning with a `#' character to
+     the end of the line is ignored.
+
+   * C-style comments. All text, including line breaks, between a
+     starting `/*' sequence and an ending `*/' sequence is ignored.
+
+   * C++-style comments. All text beginning with a `//' sequence to the
+     end of the line is ignored.
+
+
+   As expected, comment delimiters appearing within quoted strings are
+treated as literal text.
+
+   Comments are ignored when the configuration is read in, so they are
+not treated as part of the configuration. Therefore if the
+configuration is written back out to a stream, any comments that were
+present in the original configuration will be lost.
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: The C API,  Next: The C++ API,  Prev: Configuration Files,  Up: Top
+
+3 The C API
+***********
+
+This chapter describes the C library API. The type config_t represents
+a configuration, and the type config_setting_t represents a
+configuration setting.
+
+   The boolean values `CONFIG_TRUE' and `CONFIG_FALSE' are macros
+defined as `(1)' and `(0)', respectively.
+
+ -- Function: void config_init (config_t * CONFIG)
+ -- Function: void config_destroy (config_t * CONFIG)
+     These functions initialize and destroy the configuration object
+     CONFIG.
+
+     `config_init()' initializes CONFIG as a new, empty configuration.
+
+     `config_destroy()' destroys the configuration CONFIG, deallocating
+     all memory associated with the configuration, but not including
+     the config_t structure itself.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_read (config_t * CONFIG, FILE * STREAM)
+     This function reads and parses a configuration from the given
+     STREAM into the configuration object CONFIG. It returns
+     `CONFIG_TRUE' on success, or `CONFIG_FALSE' on failure; the
+     `config_error_text()' and `config_error_line()' functions,
+     described below, can be used to obtain information about the error.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_read_file (config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * FILENAME)
+     This function reads and parses a configuration from the file named
+     FILENAME into the configuration object CONFIG. It returns
+     `CONFIG_TRUE' on success, or `CONFIG_FALSE' on failure; the
+     `config_error_text()' and `config_error_line()' functions,
+     described below, can be used to obtain information about the error.
+
+
+ -- Function: void config_write (const config_t * CONFIG, FILE * STREAM)
+     This function writes the configuration CONFIG to the given STREAM.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_write_file (config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * FILENAME)
+     This function writes the configuration CONFIG to the file named
+     FILENAME. It returns `CONFIG_TRUE' on success, or `CONFIG_FALSE'
+     on failure.
+
+
+ -- Function: const char * config_error_text (const config_t * CONFIG)
+ -- Function: int config_error_line (const config_t * CONFIG)
+     These functions, which are implemented as macros, return the text
+     and line number of the parse error, if one occurred during a call
+     to `config_read()' or `config_read_file()'. Storage for the string
+     returned by `config_error_text()' is managed by the library and
+     released automatically when the configuration is destroyed; the
+     string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+
+ -- Function: void config_set_auto_convert (config_t *CONFIG, int FLAG)
+ -- Function: int config_get_auto_convert (const config_t *CONFIG)
+     `config_set_auto_convert()' enables number auto-conversion for the
+     configuration CONFIG if FLAG is non-zero, and disables it
+     otherwise. When this feature is enabled, an attempt to retrieve a
+     floating point setting's value into an integer (or vice versa), or
+     store an integer to a floating point setting's value (or vice
+     versa) will cause the library to silently perform the necessary
+     conversion (possibly leading to loss of data), rather than
+     reporting failure. By default this feature is disabled.
+
+     `config_get_auto_convert()' returns `CONFIG_TRUE' if number
+     auto-conversion is currently enabled for CONFIG; otherwise it
+     returns `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_lookup_int (const config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * PATH, long * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_lookup_int64 (const config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * PATH, long long * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_lookup_float (const config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * PATH, double * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_lookup_bool (const config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * PATH, int * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_lookup_string (const config_t * CONFIG,
+          const char * PATH, const char ** VALUE)
+     These functions look up the value of the setting in the
+     configuration CONFIG specified by the path PATH. They store the
+     value of the setting at VALUE and return `CONFIG_TRUE' on success.
+     If the setting was not found or if the type of the value did not
+     match the type requested, they leave the data pointed to by VALUE
+     unmodified and return `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+     Storage for the string returned by `config_lookup_string()' is
+     managed by the library and released automatically when the setting
+     is destroyed or when the setting's value is changed; the string
+     must not be freed by the caller.
+
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_lookup
+          (const config_t * CONFIG, const char * PATH)
+     This function locates the setting in the configuration CONFIG
+     specified by the path PATH. It returns a pointer to the
+     `config_setting_t' structure on success, or `NULL' if the setting
+     was not found.
+
+
+ -- Function: long config_setting_get_int
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: long long config_setting_get_int64
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: double config_setting_get_float
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_get_bool
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: const char * config_setting_get_string
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     These functions return the value of the given SETTING. If the type
+     of the setting does not match the type requested, a 0 or `NULL'
+     value is returned. Storage for the string returned by
+     `config_setting_get_string()' is managed by the library and
+     released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when the
+     setting's value is changed; the string must not be freed by the
+     caller.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_int (config_setting_t * SETTING,
+          long VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_int64 (config_setting_t * SETTING,
+          long long VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_float (config_setting_t * SETTING,
+          double VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_bool (config_setting_t * SETTING,
+          int VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_string
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * VALUE)
+     These functions set the value of the given SETTING to VALUE. On
+     success, they return `CONFIG_TRUE'. If the setting does not match
+     the type of the value, they return `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+     `config_setting_set_string()' makes a copy of the passed string
+     VALUE, so it may be subsequently freed or modified by the caller
+     without affecting the value of the setting.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_lookup_int
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME,
+          long * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_lookup_int64
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME,
+          long long * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_lookup_float
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME,
+          double * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_lookup_bool
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME,
+          int * VALUE)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_lookup_string
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME,
+          const char ** VALUE)
+     These functions look up the value of the child setting named NAME
+     of the setting SETTING. They store the value at VALUE and return
+     `CONFIG_TRUE' on success. If the setting was not found or if the
+     type of the value did not match the type requested, they leave the
+     data pointed to by VALUE unmodified and return `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+     Storage for the string returned by
+     `config_setting_lookup_string()' is managed by the library and
+     released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when the
+     setting's value is changed; the string must not be freed by the
+     caller.
+
+
+ -- Function: short config_setting_get_format
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_set_format
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, short FORMAT)
+     These functions get and set the external format for the setting
+     SETTING.
+
+     The FORMAT must be one of the constants `CONFIG_FORMAT_DEFAULT' or
+     `CONFIG_FORMAT_HEX'. All settings support the
+     `CONFIG_FORMAT_DEFAULT' format. The `CONFIG_FORMAT_HEX' format
+     specifies hexadecimal formatting for integer values, and hence
+     only applies to settings of type `CONFIG_TYPE_INT' and
+     `CONFIG_TYPE_INT64'.  If FORMAT is invalid for the given setting,
+     it is ignored.
+
+     `config_setting_set_format()' returns `CONFIG_TRUE' on success and
+     `CONFIG_FALSE' on failure.
+
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_get_member
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, const char * NAME)
+     This function fetches the child setting named NAME from the group
+     SETTING. It returns the requested setting on success, or `NULL' if
+     the setting was not found or if SETTING is not a group.
+
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_get_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, unsigned int IDX)
+     This function fetches the element at the given index IDX in the
+     setting SETTING, which must be an array, list, or group. It
+     returns the requested setting on success, or `NULL' if IDX is out
+     of range or if SETTING is not an array, list, or group.
+
+
+ -- Function: long config_setting_get_int_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX)
+ -- Function: long long config_setting_get_int64_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX)
+ -- Function: double config_setting_get_float_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_get_bool_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX)
+ -- Function: const char * config_setting_get_string_elem
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX)
+     These functions return the value at the specified index IDX in the
+     setting SETTING. If the setting is not an array or list, or if the
+     type of the element does not match the type requested, or if IDX
+     is out of range, they return 0 or `NULL'. Storage for the string
+     returned by `config_setting_get_string_elem()' is managed by the
+     library and released automatically when the setting is destroyed
+     or when its value is changed; the string must not be freed by the
+     caller.
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_set_int_elem
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX, long VALUE)
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_set_int64_elem
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX, long long VALUE)
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_set_float_elem
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX, double VALUE)
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_set_bool_elem
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX, int VALUE)
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_set_string_elem
+          (config_setting_t * SETTING, int IDX, const char * VALUE)
+     These functions set the value at the specified index IDX in the
+     setting SETTING to VALUE. If IDX is negative, a new element is
+     added to the end of the array or list. On success, these functions
+     return a pointer to the setting representing the element. If the
+     setting is not an array or list, or if the setting is an array and
+     the type of the array does not match the type of the value, or if
+     IDX is out of range, they return `NULL'.
+     `config_setting_set_string_elem()' makes a copy of the passed
+     string VALUE, so it may be subsequently freed or modified by the
+     caller without affecting the value of the setting.
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_add
+          (config_setting_t * PARENT, const char * NAME, int TYPE)
+     This function adds a new child setting or element to the setting
+     PARENT, which must be a group, array, or list. If PARENT is an
+     array or list, the NAME parameter is ignored and may be `NULL'.
+
+     The function returns the new setting on success, or `NULL' if
+     PARENT is not a group, array, or list; or if there is already a
+     child setting of PARENT named NAME; or if TYPE is invalid.
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_remove (config_setting_t * PARENT,
+          const char * NAME)
+     This function removes and destroys the setting named NAME from the
+     parent setting PARENT, which must be a group. Any child settings
+     of the setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+     The function returns `CONFIG_TRUE' on success. If PARENT is not a
+     group, or if it has no setting with the given name, it returns
+     `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_remove_elem
+          (config_setting_t * PARENT, unsigned int IDX)
+     This function removes the child setting at the given index IDX from
+     the setting PARENT, which must be a group, list, or array. Any
+     child settings of the removed setting are recursively destroyed as
+     well.
+
+     The function returns `CONFIG_TRUE' on success. If PARENT is not a
+     group, list, or array, or if IDX is out of range, it returns
+     `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_root_setting
+          (const config_t * CONFIG)
+     This function returns the root setting for the configuration
+     CONFIG. The root setting is a group.
+
+
+ -- Function: const char * config_setting_name
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the name of the given SETTING, or `NULL' if
+     the setting has no name. Storage for the returned string is
+     managed by the library and released automatically when the setting
+     is destroyed; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+
+ -- Function: config_setting_t * config_setting_parent
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the parent setting of the given SETTING, or
+     `NULL' if SETTING is the root setting.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_root
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns `CONFIG_TRUE' if the given SETTING is the
+     root setting, and `CONFIG_FALSE' otherwise.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_index
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the index of the given SETTING within its
+     parent setting. If SETTING is the root setting, this function
+     returns -1.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_length
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the number of settings in a group, or the
+     number of elements in a list or array. For other types of
+     settings, it returns 0.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_type (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the type of the given SETTING. The return
+     value is one of the constants `CONFIG_TYPE_INT',
+     `CONFIG_TYPE_INT64', `CONFIG_TYPE_FLOAT', `CONFIG_TYPE_STRING',
+     `CONFIG_TYPE_BOOL', `CONFIG_TYPE_ARRAY', `CONFIG_TYPE_LIST', or
+     `CONFIG_TYPE_GROUP'.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_group
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_array
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_list
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     These convenience functions, which are implemented as macros, test
+     if the setting SETTING is of a given type. They return
+     `CONFIG_TRUE' or `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_aggregate
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_scalar
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+ -- Function: int config_setting_is_number
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     These convenience functions, which are implemented as macros, test
+     if the setting SETTING is of an aggregate type (a group, array, or
+     list), of a scalar type (integer, 64-bit integer, floating point,
+     boolean, or string), and of a number (integer, 64-bit integer, or
+     floating point), respectively. They return `CONFIG_TRUE' or
+     `CONFIG_FALSE'.
+
+
+ -- Function: unsigned int config_setting_source_line
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     This function returns the line number of the configuration file or
+     stream at which the setting SETTING was parsed. This information
+     is useful for reporting application-level errors. If the setting
+     was not read from a file or stream, or if the line number is
+     otherwise unavailable, the function returns 0.
+
+
+ -- Function: void config_setting_set_hook (config_setting_t * SETTING,
+          void * HOOK)
+ -- Function: void * config_setting_get_hook
+          (const config_setting_t * SETTING)
+     These functions make it possible to attach arbitrary data to each
+     setting structure, for instance a "wrapper" or "peer" object
+     written in another programming language. The destructor function,
+     if one has been supplied via a call to `config_set_destructor()',
+     will be called by the library to dispose of this data when the
+     setting itself is destroyed. There is no default destructor.
+
+
+ -- Function: void config_set_destructor (config_t * CONFIG,
+          void (* DESTRUCTOR)(void *))
+     This function assigns the destructor function DESTRUCTOR for the
+     configuration CONFIG. This function accepts a single `void *'
+     argument and has no return value. See `config_setting_set_hook()'
+     above for more information.
+
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: The C++ API,  Next: Configuration File Grammar,  Prev: The C API,  Up: Top
+
+4 The C++ API
+*************
+
+This chapter describes the C++ library API. The class `Config'
+represents a configuration, and the class `Setting' represents a
+configuration setting. Note that by design, neither of these classes
+provides a public copy constructor or assignment operator. Therefore,
+instances of these classes may only be passed between functions via
+references or pointers.
+
+   The library defines a group of exceptions, all of which extend the
+common base exception `ConfigException'.
+
+   A `SettingTypeException' is thrown when the type of a setting's
+value does not match the type requested.
+
+   A `SettingNotFoundException' is thrown when a setting is not found.
+
+   A `SettingNameException' is thrown when an attempt is made to add a
+new setting with a non-unique or invalid name.
+
+   A `ParseException' is thrown when a parse error occurs while reading
+a configuration from a stream.
+
+   A `FileIOException' is thrown when an I/O error occurs while
+reading/writing a configuration from/to a file.
+
+   `SettingTypeException', `SettingNotFoundException', and
+`SettingNameException' all extend the common base exception
+`SettingException', which provides the following method:
+
+ -- Method on SettingException: const char * getPath ()
+     Returns the path to the setting associated with the exception, or
+     `NULL' if there is no applicable path.
+
+
+   The remainder of this chapter describes the methods for manipulating
+configurations and configuration settings.
+
+ -- Method on Config:  Config ()
+ -- Method on Config:  ~Config ()
+     These methods create and destroy `Config' objects.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: void read (FILE * STREAM)
+ -- Method on Config: void write (FILE * STREAM)
+     The `read()' method reads and parses a configuration from the given
+     STREAM. A `ParseException' is thrown if a parse error occurs.
+
+     The `write()' method writes the configuration to the given STREAM.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: void readFile (const char * FILENAME)
+ -- Method on Config: void writeFile (const char * FILENAME)
+     The `readFile()' method reads and parses a configuration from the
+     file named FILENAME. A `ParseException' is thrown if a parse error
+     occurs. A `FileIOException' is thrown if the file cannot be read.
+
+     The `writeFile()' method writes the configuration to the file
+     named FILENAME. A `FileIOException' is thrown if the file cannot
+     be written.
+
+
+ -- Method on ParseException: const char * getError ()
+ -- Method on ParseException: int getLine ()
+     If a call to `readFile()' or `read()' resulted in a
+     `ParseException', these methods can be called on the exception
+     object to obtain the text and line number of the parse error.
+     Storage for the string returned by `getError()' is managed by the
+     library; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: void setAutoConvert (bool FLAG)
+ -- Method on Config: bool getAutoConvert ()
+     `setAutoConvert()' enables number auto-conversion for the
+     configuration if FLAG is `true', and disables it otherwise. When
+     this feature is enabled, an attempt to assign a floating point
+     setting to an integer (or vice versa), or assign an integer to a
+     floating point setting (or vice versa) will cause the library to
+     silently perform the necessary conversion (possibly leading to
+     loss of data), rather than throwing a `SettingTypeException'. By
+     default this feature is disabled.
+
+     `getAutoConvert()' returns `true' if number auto-conversion is
+     currently enabled for the configuration; otherwise it returns
+     `false'.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: Setting & getRoot ()
+     This method returns the root setting for the configuration, which
+     is a group.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: Setting & lookup (const std::string &PATH)
+ -- Method on Config: Setting & lookup (const char * PATH)
+     These methods locate the setting specified by the path PATH. If
+     the requested setting is not found, a `SettingNotFoundException' is
+     thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: bool exists (const std::string &PATH)
+ -- Method on Config: bool exists (const char *PATH)
+     These methods test if a setting with the given PATH exists in the
+     configuration. They return `true' if the setting exists, and
+     `false' otherwise. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH, bool &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          bool &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH, int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH,
+          unsigned int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          unsigned int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH, long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH,
+          long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH,
+          unsigned long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          unsigned long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH, float &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          float &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH, double &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          double &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH,
+          const char *&VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          const char *&VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const char *PATH,
+          std::string &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Config: bool lookupValue (const std::string &PATH,
+          std::string &VALUE)
+     These are convenience methods for looking up the value of a setting
+     with the given PATH. If the setting is found and is of an
+     appropriate type, the value is stored in VALUE and the method
+     returns `true'. Otherwise, VALUE is left unmodified and the method
+     returns `false'. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+     Storage for const char * values is managed by the library and
+     released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when its
+     value is changed; the string must not be freed by the caller. For
+     safety and convenience, always assigning string values to a
+     `std::string' is suggested.
+
+     Since these methods have boolean return values and do not throw
+     exceptions, they can be used within boolean logic expressions. The
+     following example presents a concise way to look up three values
+     at once and perform error handling if any of them are not found or
+     are of the wrong type:
+
+
+          int var1;
+          double var2;
+          const char *var3;
+
+          if(config.lookupValue("values.var1", var1)
+             && config.lookupValue("values.var2", var2)
+             && config.lookupValue("values.var3", var3))
+          {
+            // use var1, var2, var3
+          }
+          else
+          {
+            // error handling here
+          }
+
+     This approach also takes advantage of the short-circuit evaluation
+     rules of C++, e.g., if the first lookup fails (returning `false'),
+     the remaining lookups are skipped entirely.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator bool()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator int()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator unsigned int()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator long()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator unsigned long()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator long long()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator unsigned long long()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator float()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator double()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator const char *()
+ -- Method on Setting:  operator std::string()
+     These cast operators allow a `Setting' object to be assigned to a
+     variable of type bool if it is of type `TypeBoolean'; int,
+     unsigned int, long, or unsigned long if it is of type `TypeInt';
+     `long long' or `unsigned long long' if it is of type `TypeInt64',
+     float or double if it is of type `TypeFloat'; or const char * or
+     std::string if it is of type `TypeString'.
+
+     Storage for const char * return values is managed by the library
+     and released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when
+     its value is changed; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+     For safety and convenience, always assigning string return values
+     to a `std::string' is suggested.
+
+     The following examples demonstrate this usage:
+
+          long width = config.lookup("application.window.size.w");
+
+          bool splashScreen = config.lookup("application.splash_screen");
+
+          std::string title = config.lookup("application.window.title");
+
+     Note that certain conversions can lead to loss of precision or
+     clipping of values, e.g., assigning a negative value to an unsigned
+     int (in which case the value will be treated as 0), or a
+     double-precision value to a float. The library does not treat
+     these lossy conversions as errors.
+
+     Perhaps surprisingly, the following code in particular will cause a
+     compiler error:
+
+          std::string title;
+          .
+          .
+          .
+          title = config.lookup("application.window.title");
+
+     This is because the assignment operator of `std::string' is being
+     invoked with a `Setting &' as an argument. The compiler is unable
+     to make an implicit conversion because both the `const char *' and
+     the `std::string' cast operators of `Setting' are equally
+     appropriate. This is not a bug in libconfig; providing only the
+     `const char *' cast operator would resolve this particular
+     ambiguity, but would cause assignments to `std::string' like the
+     one in the previous example to produce a compiler error. (To
+     understand why, see section 11.4.1 of The C++ Programming
+     Language.)
+
+     The solution to this problem is to use an explicit conversion that
+     avoids the construction of an intermediate `std::string' object,
+     as follows:
+
+          std::string title;
+          .
+          .
+          .
+          title = (const char *)config.lookup("application.window.title");
+
+     If the assignment is invalid due to a type mismatch, a
+     `SettingTypeException' is thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (bool VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (int VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (long VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (const long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (float VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (const double &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (const char *VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator= (const std::string &VALUE)
+     These assignment operators allow values of type bool, int, long,
+     long long, float, double, const char *, and std::string to be
+     assigned to a setting. In the case of strings, the library makes a
+     copy of the passed string VALUE, so it may be subsequently freed
+     or modified by the caller without affecting the value of the
+     setting.
+
+     If the assignment is invalid due to a type mismatch, a
+     `SettingTypeException' is thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator[] (int IDX)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator[] (const std::string &NAME)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & operator[] (const char *NAME)
+     A `Setting' object may be subscripted with an integer index IDX if
+     it is an array or list, or with either a string NAME or an integer
+     index IDX if it is a group. For example, the following code would
+     produce the string `Last Name' when applied to the example
+     configuration in *note Configuration Files::.
+
+          Setting& setting = config.lookup("application.misc");
+          const char *s = setting["columns"][0];
+
+     If the setting is not an array, list, or group, a
+     `SettingTypeException' is thrown. If the subscript (IDX or NAME)
+     does not refer to a valid element, a `SettingNotFoundException' is
+     thrown.
+
+     Iterating over a group's child settings with an integer index will
+     return the settings in the same order that they appear in the
+     configuration.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME, bool &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          bool &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME, int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          unsigned int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          unsigned int &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          unsigned long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          unsigned long long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME, long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          unsigned long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          unsigned long &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME, float &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          float &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          double &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          double &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          const char *&VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          const char *&VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const char *NAME,
+          std::string &VALUE)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool lookupValue (const std::string &NAME,
+          std::string &VALUE)
+     These are convenience methods for looking up the value of a child
+     setting with the given NAME. If the setting is found and is of an
+     appropriate type, the value is stored in VALUE and the method
+     returns `true'. Otherwise, VALUE is left unmodified and the method
+     returns `false'. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+     Storage for const char * values is managed by the library and
+     released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when its
+     value is changed; the string must not be freed by the caller. For
+     safety and convenience, always assigning string values to a
+     `std::string' is suggested.
+
+     Since these methods have boolean return values and do not throw
+     exceptions, they can be used within boolean logic expressions. The
+     following example presents a concise way to look up three values
+     at once and perform error handling if any of them are not found or
+     are of the wrong type:
+
+
+          int var1;
+          double var2;
+          const char *var3;
+
+          if(setting.lookupValue("var1", var1)
+             && setting.lookupValue("var2", var2)
+             && setting.lookupValue("var3", var3))
+          {
+            // use var1, var2, var3
+          }
+          else
+          {
+            // error handling here
+          }
+
+     This approach also takes advantage of the short-circuit evaluation
+     rules of C++, e.g., if the first lookup fails (returning `false'),
+     the remaining lookups are skipped entirely.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & add (const std::string &NAME,
+          Setting::Type TYPE)
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & add (const char *NAME,
+          Setting::Type TYPE)
+     These methods add a new child setting with the given NAME and TYPE
+     to the setting, which must be a group. They return a reference to
+     the new setting. If the setting already has a child setting with
+     the given name, or if the name is invalid, a
+     `SettingNameException' is thrown. If the setting is not a group, a
+     `SettingTypeException' is thrown.
+
+     Once a setting has been created, neither its name nor type can be
+     changed.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & add (Setting::Type TYPE)
+     This method adds a new element to the setting, which must be of
+     type `TypeArray' or `TypeList'. If the setting is an array which
+     currently has zero elements, the TYPE parameter (which must be
+     `TypeInt', `TypeInt64', `TypeFloat', `TypeBool', or `TypeString')
+     determines the type for the array; otherwise it must match the
+     type of the existing elements in the array.
+
+     The method returns the new setting on success. If TYPE is a scalar
+     type, the new setting will have a default value of 0, 0.0,
+     `false', or `NULL', depending on the type.
+
+     The method throws a `SettingTypeException' if the setting is not
+     an array or list, or if TYPE is invalid.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: void remove (const std::string &NAME)
+ -- Method on Setting: void remove (const char *NAME)
+     These methods remove the child setting with the given NAME from
+     the setting, which must be a group. Any child settings of the
+     removed setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+     If the setting is not a group, a `SettingTypeException' is thrown.
+     If the setting does not have a child setting with the given name,
+     a `SettingNotFoundException' is thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: void remove (unsigned int IDX)
+     This method removes the child setting at the given index IDX from
+     the setting, which must be a group, list, or array. Any child
+     settings of the removed setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+     If the setting is not a group, list, or array, a
+     `SettingTypeException' is thrown.  If IDX is out of range, a
+     `SettingNotFoundException' is thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: const char * getName ()
+     This method returns the name of the setting, or `NULL' if the
+     setting has no name. Storage for the returned string is managed by
+     the library and released automatically when the setting is
+     destroyed; the string must not be freed by the caller. For safety
+     and convenience, consider assigning the return value to a
+     `std::string'.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: std::string getPath ()
+     This method returns the complete dot-separated path to the
+     setting. Settings which do not have a name (list and array
+     elements) are represented by their index in square brackets.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting & getParent ()
+     This method returns the parent setting of the setting. If the
+     setting is the root setting, a `SettingNotFoundException' is
+     thrown.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isRoot ()
+     This method returns `true' if the setting is the root setting, and
+     `false' otherwise.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: int getIndex ()
+     This method returns the index of the setting within its parent
+     setting. When applied to the root setting, this method returns -1.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting::Type getType ()
+     This method returns the type of the setting. The `Setting::Type'
+     enumeration consists of the following constants: `TypeInt',
+     `TypeInt64', `TypeFloat', `TypeString', `TypeBoolean',
+     `TypeArray', `TypeList', and `TypeGroup'.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: Setting::Format getFormat ()
+ -- Method on Setting: void setFormat (Setting::Format FORMAT)
+     These methods get and set the external format for the setting.
+
+     The SETTING::FORMAT enumeration consists of the following
+     constants: `FormatDefault' and `FormatHex'. All settings support
+     the `FormatDefault' format. The `FormatHex' format specifies
+     hexadecimal formatting for integer values, and hence only applies
+     to settings of type `TypeInt' and `TypeInt64'. If FORMAT is
+     invalid for the given setting, it is ignored.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: bool exists (const std::string &NAME)
+ -- Method on Setting: bool exists (const char *NAME)
+     These methods test if the setting has a child setting with the
+     given NAME. They return `true' if the setting exists, and `false'
+     otherwise. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: int getLength ()
+     This method returns the number of settings in a group, or the
+     number of elements in a list or array. For other types of
+     settings, it returns 0.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isGroup ()
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isArray ()
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isList ()
+     These convenience methods test if a setting is of a given type.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isAggregate ()
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isScalar ()
+ -- Method on Setting: bool isNumber ()
+     These convenience methods test if a setting is of an aggregate
+     type (a group, array, or list), of a scalar type (integer, 64-bit
+     integer, floating point, boolean, or string), and of a number
+     (integer, 64-bit integer, or floating point), respectively.
+
+
+ -- Method on Setting: unsigned int getSourceLine ()
+     This method returns the line number of the configuration file or
+     stream at which the setting was parsed. This information is useful
+     for reporting application-level errors. If the setting was not
+     read from a file or stream, or if the line number is otherwise
+     unavailable, the method returns 0.
+
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Configuration File Grammar,  Next: License,  Prev: The C++ API,  Up: Top
+
+5 Configuration File Grammar
+****************************
+
+Below is the BNF grammar for configuration files. Comments are not part
+of the grammar, and hence are not included here.
+
+
+     configuration = setting-list | empty
+
+     empty =
+
+     setting-list = setting | setting-list setting
+
+     setting = name (":" | "=") value ";"
+
+     value = scalar-value | array | list | group
+
+     value-list = value | value-list "," value
+
+     scalar-value = boolean | integer | integer64 | hex | hex64 | float
+                    | string
+
+     scalar-value-list = scalar-value | scalar-value-list "," scalar-value
+
+     array = "[" (scalar-value-list | empty) "]"
+
+     list = "(" (value-list | empty) ")"
+
+     group = "{" (setting-list | empty) "}"
+
+
+
+   Terminals are defined below as regular expressions:
+
+`boolean'       `([Tt][Rr][Uu][Ee])|([Ff][Aa][Ll][Ss][Ee])'
+`string'        `\"([^\"\\]|\\.)*\"'
+`name'          `[A-Za-z\*][-A-Za-z0-9_\*]*'
+`integer'       `[-+]?[0-9]+'
+`integer64'     `[-+]?[0-9]+L(L)?'
+`hex'           `0[Xx][0-9A-Fa-f]+'
+`hex64'         `0[Xx][0-9A-Fa-f]+L(L)?'
+`float'         `([-+]?([0-9]*)?\.[0-9]*([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?)|([-+]([0-9]+)(\.[0-9]*)?[eE][-+]?[0-9]+)'
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: License,  Next: Function Index,  Prev: Configuration File Grammar,  Up: Top
+
+Appendix A License
+******************
+
+                   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                      Version 2.1, February 1999
+
+
+   Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+   Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
+license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+   [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.  It also
+counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2,
+hence the version number 2.1.]
+
+
+                               Preamble
+
+   The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+   This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated software packages-typically libraries-of the Free
+Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.  You can use
+it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this
+license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to
+use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
+
+   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,
+not price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
+you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
+for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
+it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
+it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these
+things.
+
+   To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
+rights.  These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
+you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
+
+   For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code.  If you link other code with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
+with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it.  And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+   We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
+library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+   To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
+there is no warranty for the free library.  Also, if the library is
+modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that
+what they have is not the original version, so that the original
+author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
+introduced by others.
+
+   Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of
+any free program.  We wish to make sure that a company cannot
+effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
+restrictive license from a patent holder.  Therefore, we insist that
+any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
+consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
+
+   Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
+ordinary GNU General Public License.  This license, the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is
+quite different from the ordinary General Public License.  We use this
+license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
+libraries into non-free programs.
+
+   When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using
+a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
+combined work, a derivative of the original library.  The ordinary
+General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
+combination fits its criteria of freedom.  The Lesser General Public
+License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
+library.
+
+   We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it
+does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public
+License.  It also provides other free software developers Less of an
+advantage over competing non-free programs.  These disadvantages are the
+reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
+However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special
+circumstances.
+
+   For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
+encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it
+becomes a de-facto standard.  To achieve this, non-free programs must
+be allowed to use the library.  A more frequent case is that a free
+library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries.  In this
+case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
+software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
+
+   In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
+programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free
+software.  For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free
+programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system,
+as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
+
+   Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
+users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked
+with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program
+using a modified version of the Library.
+
+   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.  Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".  The
+former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
+be combined with the library in order to run.
+
+                   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+
+  0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
+     program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
+     other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the
+     terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this
+     License").  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+     A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+     prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+     (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+     The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+     which has been distributed under these terms.  A "work based on
+     the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+     copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+     portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
+     translated straightforwardly into another language.  (Hereinafter,
+     translation is included without limitation in the term
+     "modification".)
+
+     "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+     making modifications to it.  For a library, complete source code
+     means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+     associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+     control compilation and installation of the library.
+
+     Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
+     not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act
+     of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and
+     output from such a program is covered only if its contents
+     constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of
+     the Library in a tool for writing it).  Whether that is true
+     depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses
+     the Library does.
+
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+     complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided
+     that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+     appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
+     intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
+     absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License
+     along with the Library.
+
+     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+     and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
+     for a fee.
+
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+     of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+     distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+     above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+       a. The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+
+       b. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+          stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+       c. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+          charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+       d. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or
+          a table of data to be supplied by an application program that
+          uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
+          facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort
+          to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply
+          such function or table, the facility still operates, and
+          performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+          (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots
+          has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
+          the application.  Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+          application-supplied function or table used by this function
+          must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
+          square root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+
+     These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+     identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
+     Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
+     works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
+     apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
+     works.  But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
+     whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of
+     the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions
+     for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
+     and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+     Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
+     contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
+     intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
+     derivative or collective works based on the Library.
+
+     In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
+     Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on
+     a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
+     other work under the scope of this License.
+
+
+  3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+     License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.
+     To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this
+     License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
+     License, version 2, instead of to this License.  (If a newer
+     version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License
+     has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you
+     wish.)  Do not make any other change in these notices.
+
+     Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+     that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to
+     all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+     This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
+     Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+
+  4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+     derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
+     form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
+     accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+     source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+     1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
+     interchange.
+
+     If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+     from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
+     the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+     distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+     compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+  5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+     Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
+     compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the
+     Library".  Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
+     the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+     However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+     creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because
+     it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that
+     uses the library".  The executable is therefore covered by this
+     License.  Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
+     executables.
+
+     When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header
+     file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may
+     be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is
+     not.  Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
+     can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
+     library.  The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
+     defined by law.
+
+     If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+     structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+     functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
+     object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
+     derivative work.  (Executables containing this object code plus
+     portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+     Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+     distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section
+     6.  Any executables containing that work also fall under Section
+     6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+
+  6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or
+     link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+     work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+     under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+     modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+     engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+     You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+     Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered
+     by this License.  You must supply a copy of this License.  If the
+     work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
+     the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
+     reference directing the user to the copy of this License.  Also,
+     you must do one of these things:
+
+
+       a. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+          machine-readable source code for the Library including
+          whatever changes were used in the work (which must be
+          distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
+          is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
+          machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code
+          and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library
+          and then relink to produce a modified executable containing
+          the modified Library.  (It is understood that the user who
+          changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will
+          not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use
+          the modified definitions.)
+
+
+       b. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+          Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run
+          time a copy of the library already present on the user's
+          computer system, rather than copying library functions into
+          the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
+          version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as
+          the modified version is interface-compatible with the version
+          that the work was made with.
+
+
+       c. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least
+          three years, to give the same user the materials specified in
+          Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
+          performing this distribution.
+
+
+       d. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
+          copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy
+          the above specified materials from the same place.
+
+
+       e. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+          materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+
+     For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+     Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+     reproducing the executable from it.  However, as a special
+     exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
+     anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+     form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of
+     the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
+     component itself accompanies the executable.
+
+     It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+     restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+     accompany the operating system.  Such a contradiction means you
+     cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
+     that you distribute.
+
+
+  7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+     Library side-by-side in a single library together with other
+     library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute
+     such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution
+     of the work based on the Library and of the other library
+     facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these
+     two things:
+
+
+       a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+          based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+          facilities.  This must be distributed under the terms of the
+          Sections above.
+
+
+       b. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+          that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
+          explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of
+          the same work.
+
+
+
+  8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the
+     Library except as expressly provided under this License.  Any
+     attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+     distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate
+     your rights under this License.  However, parties who have
+     received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
+     have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in
+     full compliance.
+
+
+  9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+     signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
+     or distribute the Library or its derivative works.  These actions
+     are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
+     Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
+     based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
+     License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
+     distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
+
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+     Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+     original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the
+     Library subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose
+     any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
+     granted herein.  You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
+     by third parties with this License.
+
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+     infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
+     issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
+     agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
+     License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
+     License.  If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
+     your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
+     obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
+     Library at all.  For example, if a patent license would not permit
+     royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who
+     receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only
+     way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain
+     entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
+     under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
+     intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply
+     in other circumstances.
+
+     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+     patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
+     any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
+     the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+     implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+     generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+     through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+     system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
+     willing to distribute software through any other system and a
+     licensee cannot impose that choice.
+
+     This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed
+     to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+     certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
+     the original copyright holder who places the Library under this
+     License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
+     excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
+     in or among countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this
+     License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
+     this License.
+
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+     versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
+     Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
+     version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
+     concerns.
+
+     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+     Library specifies a version number of this License which applies
+     to it and "any later version", you have the option of following
+     the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
+     version published by the Free Software Foundation.  If the Library
+     does not specify a license version number, you may choose any
+     version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+     programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with
+     these, write to the author to ask for permission.  For software
+     which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
+     Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
+     Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the
+     free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
+     promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+
+                                NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+     WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
+     LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+     HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT
+     WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
+     NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
+     FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
+     QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+     LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
+     SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
+     MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
+     LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
+     INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
+     INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+     DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
+     OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
+     OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
+     ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+
+                      END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+   If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change.  You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of
+the ordinary General Public License).
+
+   To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.
+It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
+effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have
+at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is
+found.
+
+
+<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+Lesser General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307  USA
+
+   Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
+mail.
+
+   You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
+your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library,
+if necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+   That's all there is to it!
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Function Index,  Next: Type Index,  Prev: License,  Up: Top
+
+Function Index
+**************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* add on Setting:                        The C++ API.         (line 378)
+* Config on Config:                      The C++ API.         (line  43)
+* config_destroy:                        The C API.           (line  15)
+* config_error_line:                     The C API.           (line  55)
+* config_error_text:                     The C API.           (line  54)
+* config_get_auto_convert:               The C API.           (line  65)
+* config_init:                           The C API.           (line  14)
+* config_lookup:                         The C API.           (line 104)
+* config_lookup_bool:                    The C API.           (line  87)
+* config_lookup_float:                   The C API.           (line  85)
+* config_lookup_int:                     The C API.           (line  81)
+* config_lookup_int64:                   The C API.           (line  83)
+* config_lookup_string:                  The C API.           (line  89)
+* config_read:                           The C API.           (line  26)
+* config_read_file:                      The C API.           (line  35)
+* config_root_setting:                   The C API.           (line 284)
+* config_set_auto_convert:               The C API.           (line  64)
+* config_set_destructor:                 The C API.           (line 378)
+* config_setting_add:                    The C API.           (line 251)
+* config_setting_get_bool:               The C API.           (line 118)
+* config_setting_get_bool_elem:          The C API.           (line 217)
+* config_setting_get_elem:               The C API.           (line 203)
+* config_setting_get_float:              The C API.           (line 116)
+* config_setting_get_float_elem:         The C API.           (line 215)
+* config_setting_get_format:             The C API.           (line 177)
+* config_setting_get_hook:               The C API.           (line 368)
+* config_setting_get_int:                The C API.           (line 112)
+* config_setting_get_int64:              The C API.           (line 114)
+* config_setting_get_int64_elem:         The C API.           (line 213)
+* config_setting_get_int_elem:           The C API.           (line 211)
+* config_setting_get_member:             The C API.           (line 196)
+* config_setting_get_string:             The C API.           (line 120)
+* config_setting_get_string_elem:        The C API.           (line 219)
+* config_setting_index:                  The C API.           (line 310)
+* config_setting_is_aggregate:           The C API.           (line 343)
+* config_setting_is_array:               The C API.           (line 334)
+* config_setting_is_group:               The C API.           (line 332)
+* config_setting_is_list:                The C API.           (line 336)
+* config_setting_is_number:              The C API.           (line 347)
+* config_setting_is_root:                The C API.           (line 304)
+* config_setting_is_scalar:              The C API.           (line 345)
+* config_setting_length:                 The C API.           (line 317)
+* config_setting_lookup_bool:            The C API.           (line 159)
+* config_setting_lookup_float:           The C API.           (line 156)
+* config_setting_lookup_int:             The C API.           (line 150)
+* config_setting_lookup_int64:           The C API.           (line 153)
+* config_setting_lookup_string:          The C API.           (line 162)
+* config_setting_name:                   The C API.           (line 290)
+* config_setting_parent:                 The C API.           (line 298)
+* config_setting_remove:                 The C API.           (line 261)
+* config_setting_remove_elem:            The C API.           (line 272)
+* config_setting_set_bool:               The C API.           (line 137)
+* config_setting_set_bool_elem:          The C API.           (line 236)
+* config_setting_set_float:              The C API.           (line 135)
+* config_setting_set_float_elem:         The C API.           (line 234)
+* config_setting_set_format:             The C API.           (line 179)
+* config_setting_set_hook:               The C API.           (line 366)
+* config_setting_set_int:                The C API.           (line 131)
+* config_setting_set_int64:              The C API.           (line 133)
+* config_setting_set_int64_elem:         The C API.           (line 232)
+* config_setting_set_int_elem:           The C API.           (line 230)
+* config_setting_set_string:             The C API.           (line 139)
+* config_setting_set_string_elem:        The C API.           (line 238)
+* config_setting_source_line:            The C API.           (line 357)
+* config_setting_type:                   The C API.           (line 323)
+* config_write:                          The C API.           (line  43)
+* config_write_file:                     The C API.           (line  48)
+* exists on Config:                      The C++ API.         (line 104)
+* exists on Setting:                     The C++ API.         (line 479)
+* getAutoConvert on Config:              The C++ API.         (line  77)
+* getError on ParseException:            The C++ API.         (line  67)
+* getFormat on Setting:                  The C++ API.         (line 467)
+* getIndex on Setting:                   The C++ API.         (line 455)
+* getLength on Setting:                  The C++ API.         (line 486)
+* getLine on ParseException:             The C++ API.         (line  68)
+* getName on Setting:                    The C++ API.         (line 429)
+* getParent on Setting:                  The C++ API.         (line 444)
+* getPath on Setting:                    The C++ API.         (line 438)
+* getPath on SettingException:           The C++ API.         (line  35)
+* getRoot on Config:                     The C++ API.         (line  92)
+* getSourceLine on Setting:              The C++ API.         (line 507)
+* getType on Setting:                    The C++ API.         (line 460)
+* isAggregate on Setting:                The C++ API.         (line 498)
+* isArray on Setting:                    The C++ API.         (line 493)
+* isGroup on Setting:                    The C++ API.         (line 492)
+* isList on Setting:                     The C++ API.         (line 494)
+* isNumber on Setting:                   The C++ API.         (line 500)
+* isRoot on Setting:                     The C++ API.         (line 450)
+* isScalar on Setting:                   The C++ API.         (line 499)
+* lookup on Config:                      The C++ API.         (line  97)
+* lookupValue on Config:                 The C++ API.         (line 111)
+* lookupValue on Setting:                The C++ API.         (line 298)
+* operator bool() on Setting:            The C++ API.         (line 185)
+* operator const char *() on Setting:    The C++ API.         (line 194)
+* operator double() on Setting:          The C++ API.         (line 193)
+* operator float() on Setting:           The C++ API.         (line 192)
+* operator int() on Setting:             The C++ API.         (line 186)
+* operator long long() on Setting:       The C++ API.         (line 190)
+* operator long() on Setting:            The C++ API.         (line 188)
+* operator std::string() on Setting:     The C++ API.         (line 195)
+* operator unsigned int() on Setting:    The C++ API.         (line 187)
+* operator unsigned long long() on Setting: The C++ API.      (line 191)
+* operator unsigned long() on Setting:   The C++ API.         (line 189)
+* operator= on Setting:                  The C++ API.         (line 257)
+* operator[] on Setting:                 The C++ API.         (line 276)
+* read on Config:                        The C++ API.         (line  48)
+* readFile on Config:                    The C++ API.         (line  56)
+* remove on Setting:                     The C++ API.         (line 408)
+* setAutoConvert on Config:              The C++ API.         (line  76)
+* setFormat on Setting:                  The C++ API.         (line 468)
+* write on Config:                       The C++ API.         (line  49)
+* writeFile on Config:                   The C++ API.         (line  57)
+* ~Config on Config:                     The C++ API.         (line  44)
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Type Index,  Next: Concept Index,  Prev: Function Index,  Up: Top
+
+Type Index
+**********
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Config:                                The C++ API.         (line   6)
+* config_setting_t:                      The C API.           (line   6)
+* config_t:                              The C API.           (line   6)
+* ConfigException:                       The C++ API.         (line  13)
+* FileIOException:                       The C++ API.         (line  27)
+* ParseException:                        The C++ API.         (line  24)
+* Setting:                               The C++ API.         (line   6)
+* Setting::Format:                       The C++ API.         (line 470)
+* Setting::Type:                         The C++ API.         (line 460)
+* SettingException:                      The C++ API.         (line  30)
+* SettingFormat:                         The C API.           (line 182)
+* SettingNameException:                  The C++ API.         (line  21)
+* SettingNotFoundException:              The C++ API.         (line  19)
+* SettingTypeException:                  The C++ API.         (line  16)
+
+
+File: libconfig.info,  Node: Concept Index,  Prev: Type Index,  Up: Top
+
+Concept Index
+*************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* aggregate value:                       The C API.           (line 347)
+* array:                                 Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* comment:                               Comments.            (line   6)
+* configuration:                         Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* format:                                The C API.           (line 182)
+* group:                                 Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* list:                                  Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* locale:                                Internationalization Issues.
+                                                              (line  14)
+* path:                                  Configuration Files. (line  76)
+* scalar value:                          Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* setting:                               Configuration Files. (line  23)
+* Unicode:                               Internationalization Issues.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* UTF-8:                                 Internationalization Issues.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* value:                                 Configuration Files. (line  23)
+
+
+
+Tag Table:
+Node: Top245
+Node: Introduction511
+Node: Why Another Configuration File Library?1323
+Node: Using the Library from a C Program2399
+Node: Using the Library from a C++ Program2867
+Node: Multithreading Issues3532
+Node: Internationalization Issues5099
+Node: Compiling Using pkg-config6622
+Node: Configuration Files7484
+Node: Settings11311
+Node: Groups11629
+Node: Arrays11903
+Node: Lists12175
+Node: Integer Values12461
+Node: 64-bit Integer Values12925
+Node: Floating Point Values13304
+Node: Boolean Values13761
+Node: String Values14033
+Node: Comments14922
+Node: The C API15802
+Node: The C++ API33339
+Node: Configuration File Grammar55291
+Node: License56588
+Node: Function Index84682
+Node: Type Index93076
+Node: Concept Index94241
+
+End Tag Table
diff --git a/doc/libconfig.texi b/doc/libconfig.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22f8391
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/libconfig.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,1600 @@
+\input texinfo.tex    @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c 
+@c %**start of header
+
+@c All text is ignored before the setfilename.
+@setfilename libconfig.info
+@settitle libconfig
+
+@set edition 1.3.2
+@set update-date 18 February 2009
+@set subtitle-text A Library For Processing Structured Configuration Files
+@set author-text Mark A.@: Lindner
+
+@comment %**end of header
+
+@dircategory Software libraries
+@direntry
+* libconfig: (libconfig).       A Library For Processing Structured Configuration Files
+@end direntry
+
+
+@tex
+\global\emergencystretch = .3\hsize
+@end tex
+
+@setchapternewpage odd
+
+@titlepage
+
+@title libconfig
+@subtitle @value{subtitle-text}
+@subtitle Version @value{edition}
+@subtitle @value{update-date}
+
+@author @value{author-text}
+
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Copyright @copyright{} 2005-2009  Mark A Lindner
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+@end titlepage
+
+@c Give the HTML output a title page that somewhat resembles the printed one
+@ifhtml
+@html
+<hr noshade size=6 color="black">
+<div align=right>@value{subtitle-text}<br>
+Version @value{edition}<br>
+@value{update-date}</div>
+<br><br><br><br>
+<font size=+1>@value{author-text}</font>
+<hr size=3 noshade color="black">
+<br><br>
+@end html
+@end ifhtml
+
+@contents
+
+@ifnottex
+@node Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@top libconfig
+@end ifnottex
+
+@menu
+* Introduction::
+* Configuration Files::
+* The C API::
+* The C++ API::
+* Configuration File Grammar::
+* License::
+* Function Index::
+* Type Index::
+* Concept Index::
+@end menu
+
+@node Introduction, Configuration Files, Top, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@menu
+* Why Another Configuration File Library?::
+* Using the Library from a C Program::
+* Using the Library from a C++ Program::
+* Multithreading Issues::
+* Internationalization Issues::
+* Compiling Using pkg-config::
+@end menu
+@chapter Introduction
+
+@i{Libconfig} is a library for reading, manipulating, and writing
+structured configuration files. The library features a fully
+reentrant parser and includes bindings for both the C and C++
+programming languages.
+
+The library runs on modern POSIX-compilant systems, such as Linux,
+Solaris, and Mac OS X (Darwin), as well as on Microsoft Windows
+2000/XP and later (with either Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or later,
+or the GNU toolchain via the MinGW environment).
+
+@node Why Another Configuration File Library?, Using the Library from a C Program, , Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Why Another Configuration File Library?
+
+There are several open-source configuration file libraries available
+as of this writing. This library was written because each of those
+libraries falls short in one or more ways. The main features of
+@i{libconfig} that set it apart from the other libraries are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item A fully reentrant parser. Independent configurations can be parsed in concurrent threads at the same time.
+
+@item Both C @i{and} C++ bindings, as well as hooks to allow for the creation of wrappers in other languages.
+
+@item A simple, structured configuration file format that is more
+readable and compact than XML and more flexible than the obsolete but
+prevalent Windows ``INI'' file format.
+
+@item A low-footprint implementation (just 38K for the C library and 66K for the C++ library) that is suitable for memory-constrained systems.
+
+@item Proper documentation.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@node Using the Library from a C Program, Using the Library from a C++ Program, Why Another Configuration File Library?, Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Using the Library from a C Program
+
+To use the library from C code, include the following preprocessor
+directive in your source files:
+
+@sp 1
+@example
+#include <libconfig.h>
+@end example
+@sp 1
+
+To link with the library, specify @samp{-lconfig} as an argument to the
+linker.
+
+@node Using the Library from a C++ Program, Multithreading Issues, Using the Library from a C Program, Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Using the Library from a C++ Program
+
+To use the library from C++, include the following preprocessor
+directive in your source files:
+
+@sp 1
+@example
+#include <libconfig.h++>
+@end example
+@sp 1
+
+Or, alternatively:
+
+@sp 1
+@example
+#include <libconfig.hh>
+@end example
+@sp 1
+@page
+The C++ API classes are defined in the namespace @samp{libconfig}, hence the
+following statement may optionally be used:
+
+@sp 1
+@example
+using namespace libconfig;
+@end example
+@sp 1
+
+To link with the library, specify @samp{-lconfig++} as an argument to
+the linker.
+
+@node Multithreading Issues, Internationalization Issues, Using the Library from a C++ Program, Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Multithreading Issues
+
+@i{Libconfig} is fully @dfn{reentrant}; the functions in the library
+do not make use of global variables and do not maintain state between
+successive calls. Therefore two independent configurations may be safely
+manipulated concurrently by two distinct threads.
+
+@i{Libconfig} is not @dfn{thread-safe}. The library is not aware of
+the presence of threads and knows nothing about the host system's
+threading model. Therefore, if an instance of a configuration is to be
+accessed from multiple threads, it must be suitably protected by
+synchronization mechanisms like read-write locks or mutexes; the
+standard rules for safe multithreaded access to shared data must be
+observed.
+
+@i{Libconfig} is not @dfn{async-safe}. Calls should not be made into
+the library from signal handlers, because some of the C library
+routines that it uses may not be async-safe.
+
+@i{Libconfig} is not guaranteed to be @dfn{cancel-safe}. Since it is
+not aware of the host system's threading model, the library does not
+contain any thread cancellation points. In most cases this will not be
+an issue for multithreaded programs. However, be aware that some of
+the routines in the library (namely those that read/write
+configurations from/to files or streams) perform I/O using C library
+routines which may potentially block; whether or not these C library
+routines are cancel-safe depends on the host system.
+
+@node Internationalization Issues, Compiling Using pkg-config, Multithreading Issues, Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Internationalization Issues
+
+@cindex Unicode
+@cindex UTF-8
+@i{Libconfig} does not natively support Unicode configuration files,
+but string values may contain Unicode text encoded in UTF-8; such
+strings will be treated as ordinary 8-bit ASCII text by the
+library. It is the responsibility of the calling program to perform
+the necessary conversions to/from wide (@t{wchar_t}) strings using the
+wide string conversion functions such as @t{mbsrtowcs()} and
+@t{wcsrtombs()} or the @t{iconv()} function of the @i{libiconv}
+library.
+
+@cindex locale
+The textual representation of a floating point value varies by
+locale. However, the @i{libconfig} grammar specifies that
+floating point values are represented using a period (`.') as the
+radix symbol; this is consistent with the grammar of most programming
+languages. When a configuration is read in or written out,
+@i{libconfig} temporarily changes the @t{LC_NUMERIC} category of the
+locale of the calling thread to the "C" locale to ensure consistent
+handling of floating point values regardless of the locale(s) in use
+by the calling program.
+
+Note that the MinGW environment does not (as of this writing) provide
+functions for changing the locale of the calling thread. Therefore,
+when using @i{libconfig} in that environment, the calling program is
+responsible for changing the @t{LC_NUMERIC} category of the locale to
+the "C" locale before reading or writing a configuration.
+
+@node Compiling Using pkg-config, , Internationalization Issues, Introduction
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Compiling Using pkg-config
+
+On UNIX systems you can use the @i{pkg-config} utility (version 0.20
+or later) to automatically select the appropriate compiler and linker
+switches for @i{libconfig}. Ensure that the environment variable
+@samp{PKG_CONFIG_PATH} contains the absolute path to the
+@file{lib/pkgconfig} subdirectory of the @i{libconfig} installation. Then,
+you can compile and link C programs with @i{libconfig} as follows:
+
+@example
+gcc `pkg-config --cflags libconfig` myprogram.c -o myprogram \
+    `pkg-config --libs libconfig`
+@end example
+@sp 1
+
+And similarly, for C++ programs:
+
+@example
+g++ `pkg-config --cflags libconfig++` myprogram.cpp -o myprogram \
+    `pkg-config --libs libconfig++`
+@end example
+
+@sp 1
+Note the backticks in the above examples.
+
+@node Configuration Files, The C API, Introduction, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@menu
+* Settings::
+* Groups::
+* Arrays::
+* Lists::
+* Integer Values::
+* 64-bit Integer Values::
+* Floating Point Values::
+* Boolean Values::
+* String Values::
+* Comments::
+@end menu
+@chapter Configuration Files
+
+@i{Libconfig} supports structured, hierarchical configurations. These
+configurations can be read from and written to files and manipulated
+in memory.
+
+@cindex setting
+@cindex value
+@cindex scalar value
+@cindex array
+@cindex group
+@cindex list
+@cindex configuration
+A @dfn{configuration} consists of a group of @dfn{settings}, which
+associate names with values. A @dfn{value} can be one of the
+following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item A @dfn{scalar value}: integer, 64-bit integer, floating-point number, boolean,
+or string
+@item An @dfn{array}, which is a sequence of scalar values, all of which must have the same type
+@item A @dfn{group}, which is a collection of settings
+@item A @dfn{list}, which is a sequence of values of any type, including other lists
+@end itemize
+
+Consider the following configuration file for a hypothetical GUI
+application, which illustrates all of the elements of the configuration
+file grammar.
+
+@sp 1
+@cartouche
+@smallexample
+# Example application configuration file
+
+version = "1.0";
+
+application:
+@{
+  window:
+  @{
+    title = "My Application";
+    size = @{ w = 640; h = 480; @};
+    pos = @{ x = 350; y = 250; @};
+  @};
+
+  list = ( ( "abc", 123, true ), 1.234, ( /* an empty list */) );
+
+  books = ( @{ title  = "Treasure Island";
+              author = "Robert Louis Stevenson";
+              price  = 29.95;
+              qty    = 5; @},
+            @{ title  = "Snow Crash";
+              author = "Neal Stephenson";
+              price  = 9.99;
+              qty    = 8; @} );
+
+  misc:
+  @{
+    pi = 3.141592654;
+    bigint = 9223372036854775807L;
+    columns = [ "Last Name", "First Name", "MI" ];
+    bitmask = 0x1FC3;
+  @};
+@};
+@end smallexample
+@end cartouche
+@sp 1
+
+@cindex path
+Settings can be uniquely identified within the configuration by a
+@dfn{path}. The path is a dot-separated sequence of names, beginning
+at a top-level group and ending at the setting itself. Each name in
+the path is the name of a setting; if the setting has no name because
+it is an element in a list or array, an integer index in square
+brackets can be used as the name.
+
+For example, in our hypothetical configuration file, the path to the
+@code{x} setting is @code{application.window.pos.x}; the path to the
+@code{version} setting is simply @code{version}; and the path to the
+@code{title} setting of the second book in the @code{books} list is
+@code{application.books.[1].title}.
+
+The datatype of a value is determined from the format of the value
+itself. If the value is enclosed in double quotes, it is treated as a
+string. If it looks like an integer or floating point number, it is
+treated as such. If it is one of the values @code{TRUE}, @code{true},
+@code{FALSE}, or @code{false} (or any other mixed-case version of
+those tokens, e.g., @code{True} or @code{FaLsE}), it is treated as a
+boolean. If it consists of a comma-separated list of values enclosed
+in square brackets, it is treated as an array. And if it consists of a
+comma-separated list of values enclosed in parentheses, it is treated
+as a list. Any value which does not meet any of these criteria is
+considered invalid and results in a parse error.
+
+All names are case-sensitive. They may consist only of alphanumeric
+characters, dashes (@samp{-}), underscores (@samp{_}), and asterisks
+(@samp{*}), and must begin with a letter or asterisk. No other
+characters are allowed.
+
+In C and C++, integer, 64-bit integer, floating point, and string
+values are mapped to the types @code{long}, @code{long long},
+@code{double}, and @code{const char *}, respectively. The boolean type
+is mapped to @code{int} in C and @code{bool} in C++.
+
+The following sections describe the elements of the configuration file
+grammar in additional detail.
+
+@node Settings, Groups, , Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Settings
+
+A setting has the form:
+
+@i{name} @b{=} @i{value} @b{;}
+
+or:
+
+@i{name} @b{:} @i{value} @b{;}
+
+The trailing semicolon is required. Whitespace is not significant.
+
+The value may be a scalar value, an array, a group, or a list.
+
+@node Groups, Arrays, Settings, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Groups
+
+A group has the form:
+
+@b{@{}
+   @i{settings ...}
+@b{@}}
+
+Groups can contain any number of settings, but each setting must have
+a unique name within the group.
+
+@node Arrays, Lists, Groups, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Arrays
+
+An array has the form:
+
+@b{[} @i{value}@b{,} @i{value ...} @b{]}
+
+An array may have zero or more elements, but the elements must all be
+scalar values of the same type.
+
+@node Lists, Integer Values, Arrays, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Lists
+
+A list has the form:
+
+@b{(} @i{value}@b{,} @i{value ...} @b{)}
+
+A list may have zero or more elements, each of which can be a scalar
+value, an array, a group, or another list.
+
+@node Integer Values, 64-bit Integer Values, Lists, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Integer Values
+
+Integers can be represented in one of two ways: as a series of one or
+more decimal digits (@samp{0} - @samp{9}), with an optional leading
+sign character (@samp{+} or @samp{-}); or as a hexadecimal value
+consisting of the characters @samp{0x} followed by a series of one or
+more hexadecimal digits (@samp{0} - @samp{9}, @samp{A} - @samp{F},
+@samp{a} - @samp{f}).
+
+@node 64-bit Integer Values, Floating Point Values, Integer Values, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section 64-bit Integer Values
+
+Long long (64-bit) integers are represented identically to integers,
+except that an 'L' character is appended to indicate a 64-bit
+value. For example, @samp{0L} indicates a 64-bit integer value 0.
+
+@node Floating Point Values, Boolean Values, 64-bit Integer Values, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Floating Point Values
+
+Floating point values consist of a series of one or more digits, one
+decimal point, an optional leading sign character (@samp{+} or
+@samp{-}), and an optional exponent. An exponent consists of the
+letter @samp{E} or @samp{e}, an optional sign character, and a series
+of one or more digits.
+
+@node Boolean Values, String Values, Floating Point Values, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Boolean Values
+
+Boolean values may have one of the following values: @samp{true},
+@samp{false}, or any mixed-case variation thereof.
+
+@node String Values, Comments, Boolean Values, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section String Values
+
+String values consist of arbitrary text delimited by double
+quotes. Literal double quotes can be escaped by preceding them with a
+backslash: @samp{\"}. The escape sequences @samp{\\}, @samp{\f},
+@samp{\n}, @samp{\r}, and @samp{\t} are also recognized, and have the
+usual meaning. No other escape sequences are currently supported.
+
+Adjacent strings are automatically concatenated, as in C/C++ source
+code. This is useful for formatting very long strings as sequences of
+shorter strings. For example, the following constructs are equivalent:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@code{"The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog."}
+
+@item
+@code{"The quick brown fox"} @*
+@code{" jumped over the lazy dog."}
+
+@item
+@code{"The quick" /* comment */ " brown fox " // another comment} @*
+@code{"jumped over the lazy dog."}
+
+@end itemize
+@page
+@node Comments, , String Values, Configuration Files
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Comments
+
+@cindex comment
+Three types of comments are allowed within a configuration:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Script-style comments. All text beginning with a @samp{#} character
+to the end of the line is ignored.
+
+@item C-style comments. All text, including line breaks, between a starting
+@samp{/*} sequence and an ending @samp{*/} sequence is ignored.
+
+@item C++-style comments. All text beginning with a @samp{//} sequence to the
+end of the line is ignored.
+
+@end itemize
+
+As expected, comment delimiters appearing within quoted strings are
+treated as literal text.
+
+Comments are ignored when the configuration is read in, so they are
+not treated as part of the configuration. Therefore if the
+configuration is written back out to a stream, any comments that were
+present in the original configuration will be lost.
+
+@node The C API, The C++ API, Configuration Files, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter The C API
+
+@tindex config_t
+@tindex config_setting_t
+This chapter describes the C library API. The type @i{config_t}
+represents a configuration, and the type @i{config_setting_t} represents
+a configuration setting.
+
+The boolean values @code{CONFIG_TRUE} and @code{CONFIG_FALSE} are
+macros defined as @code{(1)} and @code{(0)}, respectively.
+
+@deftypefun void config_init (@w{config_t * @var{config}})
+@deftypefunx void config_destroy (@w{config_t * @var{config}})
+
+These functions initialize and destroy the configuration object @var{config}. 
+
+@code{config_init()} initializes @var{config} as a new, empty
+configuration.
+
+@code{config_destroy()} destroys the configuration @var{config},
+deallocating all memory associated with the configuration, but not
+including the @i{config_t} structure itself.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_read (@w{config_t * @var{config}}, @w{FILE * @var{stream}})
+
+This function reads and parses a configuration from the given
+@var{stream} into the configuration object @var{config}. It returns
+@code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success, or @code{CONFIG_FALSE} on failure; the
+@code{config_error_text()} and @code{config_error_line()}
+functions, described below, can be used to obtain information about the
+error.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_read_file (@w{config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{filename}})
+
+This function reads and parses a configuration from the file named
+@var{filename} into the configuration object @var{config}. It returns
+@code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success, or @code{CONFIG_FALSE} on failure; the
+@code{config_error_text()} and @code{config_error_line()} functions,
+described below, can be used to obtain information about the error.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void config_write (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{FILE * @var{stream}})
+
+This function writes the configuration @var{config} to the given
+@var{stream}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_write_file (@w{config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{filename}})
+
+This function writes the configuration @var{config} to the file named
+@var{filename}. It returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success, or
+@code{CONFIG_FALSE} on failure.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {const char *} config_error_text (@w{const config_t * @var{config}})
+@deftypefunx int config_error_line (@w{const config_t * @var{config}})
+
+These functions, which are implemented as macros, return the text and
+line number of the parse error, if one occurred during a call to
+@code{config_read()} or @code{config_read_file()}. Storage for the
+string returned by @code{config_error_text()} is managed by the
+library and released automatically when the configuration is
+destroyed; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void config_set_auto_convert (@w{config_t *@var{config}}, @w{int @var{flag}})
+@deftypefunx int config_get_auto_convert (@w{const config_t *@var{config}})
+
+@code{config_set_auto_convert()} enables number auto-conversion for
+the configuration @var{config} if @var{flag} is non-zero, and disables
+it otherwise. When this feature is enabled, an attempt to retrieve a
+floating point setting's value into an integer (or vice versa), or
+store an integer to a floating point setting's value (or vice versa)
+will cause the library to silently perform the necessary conversion
+(possibly leading to loss of data), rather than reporting failure. By
+default this feature is disabled.
+
+@code{config_get_auto_convert()} returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} if number
+auto-conversion is currently enabled for @var{config}; otherwise it
+returns @code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_lookup_int (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}}, @w{long * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_lookup_int64 (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}}, @w{long long * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_lookup_float (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}}, @w{double * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_lookup_bool (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}}, @w{int * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_lookup_string (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}}, @w{const char ** @var{value}})
+
+These functions look up the value of the setting in the configuration
+@var{config} specified by the path @var{path}. They store the value of
+the setting at @var{value} and return @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on
+success. If the setting was not found or if the type of the value did
+not match the type requested, they leave the data pointed to by
+@var{value} unmodified and return @code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+Storage for the string returned by @code{config_lookup_string()} is
+managed by the library and released automatically when the setting is
+destroyed or when the setting's value is changed; the string must not
+be freed by the caller.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_lookup (@w{const config_t * @var{config}}, @w{const char * @var{path}})
+
+This function locates the setting in the configuration @var{config}
+specified by the path @var{path}. It returns a pointer to the
+@code{config_setting_t} structure on success, or @code{NULL} if the
+setting was not found.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun long config_setting_get_int (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx {long long} config_setting_get_int64 (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx double config_setting_get_float (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_get_bool (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx {const char *} config_setting_get_string (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+These functions return the value of the given @var{setting}. If the
+type of the setting does not match the type requested, a 0 or
+@code{NULL} value is returned. Storage for the string returned by
+@code{config_setting_get_string()} is managed by the library and
+released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when the
+setting's value is changed; the string must not be freed by the
+caller.
+
+@end deftypefun
+@page
+@deftypefun int config_setting_set_int (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{long @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_set_int64 (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{long long @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_set_float (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{double @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_set_bool (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_set_string (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{value}})
+
+These functions set the value of the given @var{setting} to
+@var{value}. On success, they return @code{CONFIG_TRUE}. If
+the setting does not match the type of the value, they return
+@code{CONFIG_FALSE}. @code{config_setting_set_string()} makes a copy
+of the passed string @var{value}, so it may be subsequently freed or
+modified by the caller without affecting the value of the setting.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_lookup_int (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{long * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_lookup_int64 (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{long long * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_lookup_float (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{double * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_lookup_bool (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{int * @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_lookup_string (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{const char ** @var{value}})
+
+These functions look up the value of the child setting named
+@var{name} of the setting @var{setting}. They store the value at
+@var{value} and return @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success. If the setting
+was not found or if the type of the value did not match the type
+requested, they leave the data pointed to by @var{value} unmodified
+and return @code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+Storage for the string returned by @code{config_setting_lookup_string()} is
+managed by the library and released automatically when the setting is
+destroyed or when the setting's value is changed; the string must not
+be freed by the caller.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun short config_setting_get_format (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_set_format (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{short @var{format}})
+
+These functions get and set the external format for the setting @var{setting}.
+
+@tindex SettingFormat
+@cindex format
+
+The @var{format} must be one of the constants
+@code{CONFIG_FORMAT_DEFAULT} or @code{CONFIG_FORMAT_HEX}. All settings
+support the @code{CONFIG_FORMAT_DEFAULT} format. The
+@code{CONFIG_FORMAT_HEX} format specifies hexadecimal formatting for
+integer values, and hence only applies to settings of type
+@code{CONFIG_TYPE_INT} and @code{CONFIG_TYPE_INT64}.  If @var{format}
+is invalid for the given setting, it is ignored.
+
+@code{config_setting_set_format()} returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on
+success and @code{CONFIG_FALSE} on failure.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_setting_get_member (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{const char * @var{name}})
+
+This function fetches the child setting named @var{name} from the group
+@var{setting}. It returns the requested setting on success, or
+@code{NULL} if the setting was not found or if @var{setting} is not a
+group.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_setting_get_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{unsigned int @var{idx}})
+
+This function fetches the element at the given index @var{idx} in the
+setting @var{setting}, which must be an array, list, or group. It returns the
+requested setting on success, or @code{NULL} if @var{idx} is out of
+range or if @var{setting} is not an array, list, or group.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun long config_setting_get_int_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}})
+@deftypefunx {long long} config_setting_get_int64_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}})
+@deftypefunx double config_setting_get_float_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_get_bool_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}})
+@deftypefunx {const char *} config_setting_get_string_elem (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}})
+
+These functions return the value at the specified index @var{idx} in the
+setting @var{setting}. If the setting is not an array or list, or if
+the type of the element does not match the type requested, or if
+@var{idx} is out of range, they return 0 or @code{NULL}. Storage for
+the string returned by @code{config_setting_get_string_elem()} is
+managed by the library and released automatically when the setting is
+destroyed or when its value is changed; the string must not be freed
+by the caller.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_setting_set_int_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}}, @w{long @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx {config_setting_t *} config_setting_set_int64_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}}, @w{long long @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx {config_setting_t *} config_setting_set_float_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}}, @w{double @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx {config_setting_t *} config_setting_set_bool_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}}, @w{int @var{value}})
+@deftypefunx {config_setting_t *} config_setting_set_string_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{int @var{idx}}, @w{const char * @var{value}})
+
+These functions set the value at the specified index @var{idx} in the
+setting @var{setting} to @var{value}. If @var{idx} is negative, a
+new element is added to the end of the array or list. On success,
+these functions return a pointer to the setting representing the
+element. If the setting is not an array or list, or if the setting is
+an array and the type of the array does not match the type of the
+value, or if @var{idx} is out of range, they return
+@code{NULL}. @code{config_setting_set_string_elem()} makes a copy of
+the passed string @var{value}, so it may be subsequently freed or
+modified by the caller without affecting the value of the setting.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_setting_add (@w{config_setting_t * @var{parent}}, @w{const char * @var{name}}, @w{int @var{type}})
+
+This function adds a new child setting or element to the setting
+@var{parent}, which must be a group, array, or list. If @var{parent}
+is an array or list, the @var{name} parameter is ignored and may be
+@code{NULL}.
+
+The function returns the new setting on success, or @code{NULL} if
+@var{parent} is not a group, array, or list; or if there is already a
+child setting of @var{parent} named @var{name}; or if @var{type} is
+invalid.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_remove (@w{config_setting_t * @var{parent}}, @w{const char * @var{name}})
+
+This function removes and destroys the setting named @var{name} from
+the parent setting @var{parent}, which must be a group. Any child
+settings of the setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+The function returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success. If @var{parent} is
+not a group, or if it has no setting with the given name, it returns
+@code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_remove_elem (@w{config_setting_t * @var{parent}}, @w{unsigned int @var{idx}})
+
+This function removes the child setting at the given index @var{idx} from
+the setting @var{parent}, which must be a group, list, or array. Any
+child settings of the removed setting are recursively destroyed as
+well.
+
+The function returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} on success. If @var{parent} is
+not a group, list, or array, or if @var{idx} is out of range, it returns
+@code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_root_setting (@w{const config_t * @var{config}})
+
+This function returns the root setting for the configuration
+@var{config}. The root setting is a group.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {const char *} config_setting_name (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the name of the given @var{setting}, or
+@code{NULL} if the setting has no name. Storage for the returned
+string is managed by the library and released automatically when the
+setting is destroyed; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {config_setting_t *} config_setting_parent (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the parent setting of the given @var{setting},
+or @code{NULL} if @var{setting} is the root setting.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_is_root (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns @code{CONFIG_TRUE} if the given @var{setting} is
+the root setting, and @code{CONFIG_FALSE} otherwise.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_index (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the index of the given @var{setting} within its
+parent setting. If @var{setting} is the root setting, this function
+returns -1.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_length (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the number of settings in a group, or the number of
+elements in a list or array. For other types of settings, it returns
+0.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_type (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the type of the given @var{setting}. The return
+value is one of the constants
+@code{CONFIG_TYPE_INT}, @code{CONFIG_TYPE_INT64}, @code{CONFIG_TYPE_FLOAT},
+@code{CONFIG_TYPE_STRING}, @code{CONFIG_TYPE_BOOL},
+@code{CONFIG_TYPE_ARRAY}, @code{CONFIG_TYPE_LIST}, or @code{CONFIG_TYPE_GROUP}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_is_group (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_is_array (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_is_list (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+These convenience functions, which are implemented as macros, test if
+the setting @var{setting} is of a given type. They return
+@code{CONFIG_TRUE} or @code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int config_setting_is_aggregate (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_is_scalar (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+@deftypefunx int config_setting_is_number (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+@cindex aggregate value
+These convenience functions, which are implemented as macros, test if
+the setting @var{setting} is of an aggregate type (a group, array, or
+list), of a scalar type (integer, 64-bit integer, floating point,
+boolean, or string), and of a number (integer, 64-bit integer, or
+floating point), respectively. They return @code{CONFIG_TRUE} or
+@code{CONFIG_FALSE}.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {unsigned int} config_setting_source_line (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+This function returns the line number of the configuration file or
+stream at which the setting @var{setting} was parsed. This information
+is useful for reporting application-level errors. If the setting was
+not read from a file or stream, or if the line number is otherwise
+unavailable, the function returns 0.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void config_setting_set_hook (@w{config_setting_t * @var{setting}}, @w{void * @var{hook}})
+@deftypefunx {void *} config_setting_get_hook (@w{const config_setting_t * @var{setting}})
+
+These functions make it possible to attach arbitrary data to each
+setting structure, for instance a ``wrapper'' or ``peer'' object written in
+another programming language. The destructor function, if one has been
+supplied via a call to @code{config_set_destructor()}, will be called
+by the library to dispose of this data when the setting itself is
+destroyed. There is no default destructor.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void config_set_destructor (@w{config_t * @var{config}}, @w{void (* @var{destructor})(void *)})
+
+This function assigns the destructor function @var{destructor} for the
+configuration @var{config}. This function accepts a single @code{void
+*} argument and has no return value. See
+@code{config_setting_set_hook()} above for more information.
+
+@end deftypefun
+
+@node The C++ API, Configuration File Grammar, The C API, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter The C++ API
+
+@tindex Config
+@tindex Setting
+This chapter describes the C++ library API. The class @code{Config}
+represents a configuration, and the class @code{Setting} represents a
+configuration setting. Note that by design, neither of these classes
+provides a public copy constructor or assignment operator. Therefore,
+instances of these classes may only be passed between functions via
+references or pointers.
+
+@tindex ConfigException
+The library defines a group of exceptions, all of which extend the
+common base exception @code{ConfigException}.
+
+@tindex SettingTypeException
+A @code{SettingTypeException} is thrown when the type of a setting's
+value does not match the type requested.
+
+@tindex SettingNotFoundException
+A @code{SettingNotFoundException} is thrown when a setting is not found.
+
+@tindex SettingNameException
+A @code{SettingNameException} is thrown when an attempt is made to add
+a new setting with a non-unique or invalid name.
+
+@tindex ParseException
+A @code{ParseException} is thrown when a parse error occurs while
+reading a configuration from a stream.
+
+@tindex FileIOException
+A @code{FileIOException} is thrown when an I/O error occurs while
+reading/writing a configuration from/to a file.
+
+@tindex SettingException
+@code{SettingTypeException}, @code{SettingNotFoundException}, and
+@code{SettingNameException} all extend the common base
+exception @code{SettingException}, which provides the following method:
+
+@deftypemethod SettingException {const char *} getPath ()
+
+Returns the path to the setting associated with the exception, or
+@code{NULL} if there is no applicable path.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+The remainder of this chapter describes the methods for manipulating
+configurations and configuration settings.
+
+@deftypemethod Config {} Config ()
+@deftypemethodx Config {} ~Config ()
+
+These methods create and destroy @code{Config} objects. 
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config void read (@w{FILE * @var{stream}})
+@deftypemethodx Config void write (@w{FILE * @var{stream}})
+
+The @code{read()} method reads and parses a configuration from the given
+@var{stream}. A @code{ParseException} is thrown if a parse error occurs.
+
+The @code{write()} method writes the configuration to the given @var{stream}.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config void readFile (@w{const char * @var{filename}})
+@deftypemethodx Config void writeFile (@w{const char * @var{filename}})
+
+The @code{readFile()} method reads and parses a configuration from the file
+named @var{filename}. A @code{ParseException} is thrown if a parse error occurs. A
+@code{FileIOException} is thrown if the file cannot be read.
+
+The @code{writeFile()} method writes the configuration to the file
+named @var{filename}. A @code{FileIOException} is thrown if the file cannot
+be written.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod ParseException {const char *} getError ()
+@deftypemethodx ParseException int getLine ()
+
+If a call to @code{readFile()} or @code{read()} resulted in a
+@code{ParseException}, these methods can be called on the exception
+object to obtain the text and line number of the parse error. Storage
+for the string returned by @code{getError()} is managed by the
+library; the string must not be freed by the caller.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config void setAutoConvert (bool @var{flag})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool getAutoConvert ()
+
+@code{setAutoConvert()} enables number auto-conversion for the
+configuration if @var{flag} is @code{true}, and disables it
+otherwise. When this feature is enabled, an attempt to assign a
+floating point setting to an integer (or vice versa), or
+assign an integer to a floating point setting (or vice versa) will
+cause the library to silently perform the necessary conversion
+(possibly leading to loss of data), rather than throwing a
+@code{SettingTypeException}. By default this feature is disabled.
+
+@code{getAutoConvert()} returns @code{true} if number auto-conversion
+is currently enabled for the configuration; otherwise it returns
+@code{false}.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config {Setting &} getRoot ()
+
+This method returns the root setting for the configuration, which is a group.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config {Setting &} lookup (@w{const std::string &@var{path}})
+@deftypemethodx Config {Setting &} lookup (@w{const char * @var{path}})
+
+These methods locate the setting specified by the path @var{path}. If
+the requested setting is not found, a @code{SettingNotFoundException} is
+thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+@deftypemethod Config bool exists (@w{const std::string &@var{path}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool exists (@w{const char *@var{path}})
+
+These methods test if a setting with the given @var{path} exists in
+the configuration. They return @code{true} if the setting exists, and
+@code{false} otherwise. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{bool &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{bool &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{int &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{int &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{unsigned int &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{unsigned int &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{long long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{long long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{unsigned long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{unsigned long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{float &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{float &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{double &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{double &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{const char *&@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{const char *&@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{path}}, @w{std::string &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Config bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{path}}, @w{std::string &@var{value}})
+
+These are convenience methods for looking up the value of a setting
+with the given @var{path}. If the setting is found and is of an
+appropriate type, the value is stored in @var{value} and the method
+returns @code{true}. Otherwise, @var{value} is left unmodified and the
+method returns @code{false}. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+Storage for @w{@i{const char *}} values is managed by the library and
+released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when its value
+is changed; the string must not be freed by the caller. For safety and
+convenience, always assigning string values to a @code{std::string} is
+suggested.
+
+Since these methods have boolean return values and do not throw
+exceptions, they can be used within boolean logic expressions. The following
+example presents a concise way to look up three values at once and
+perform error handling if any of them are not found or are of the
+wrong type:
+
+@sp 1
+@cartouche
+@example
+int var1;
+double var2;
+const char *var3;
+
+if(config.lookupValue("values.var1", var1)
+   && config.lookupValue("values.var2", var2)
+   && config.lookupValue("values.var3", var3))
+@{
+  // use var1, var2, var3
+@}
+else
+@{
+  // error handling here
+@}
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+This approach also takes advantage of the short-circuit evaluation rules
+of C++, e.g., if the first lookup fails (returning @code{false}), the
+remaining lookups are skipped entirely.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+@page
+@deftypemethod Setting {} {operator bool()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator int()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator unsigned int()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator long()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator unsigned long()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator long long()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator unsigned long long()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator float()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator double()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator const char *()}
+@deftypemethodx Setting {} {operator std::string()}
+
+These cast operators allow a @code{Setting} object to be assigned to a
+variable of type @i{bool} if it is of type @code{TypeBoolean};
+@i{int}, @i{unsigned int}, @i{long}, or @i{unsigned long} if it is of
+type @code{TypeInt}; @code{long long} or @code{unsigned long long} if
+it is of type @code{TypeInt64}, @i{float} or @i{double} if it is of type
+@code{TypeFloat}; or @w{@i{const char *}} or @i{std::string} if it is
+of type @code{TypeString}.
+
+Storage for @w{@i{const char *}} return values is managed by the
+library and released automatically when the setting is destroyed or
+when its value is changed; the string must not be freed by the
+caller. For safety and convenience, always assigning string return
+values to a @code{std::string} is suggested.
+
+The following examples demonstrate this usage:
+
+@cartouche
+@example
+long width = config.lookup("application.window.size.w");
+
+bool splashScreen = config.lookup("application.splash_screen");
+
+std::string title = config.lookup("application.window.title");
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+Note that certain conversions can lead to loss of precision or
+clipping of values, e.g., assigning a negative value to an @i{unsigned
+int} (in which case the value will be treated as 0), or a
+double-precision value to a @i{float}. The library does not treat
+these lossy conversions as errors.
+
+Perhaps surprisingly, the following code in particular will cause a
+compiler error:
+
+@cartouche
+@example
+std::string title;
+.
+.
+.
+title = config.lookup("application.window.title");
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+This is because the assignment operator of @code{std::string} is being
+invoked with a @code{Setting &} as an argument. The compiler is unable
+to make an implicit conversion because both the @code{const char *}
+and the @code{std::string} cast operators of @code{Setting} are
+equally appropriate. This is not a bug in @i{libconfig}; providing
+only the @code{const char *} cast operator would resolve this
+particular ambiguity, but would cause assignments to
+@code{std::string} like the one in the previous example to produce a
+compiler error. (To understand why, see section 11.4.1 of @i{The C++
+Programming Language}.)
+
+The solution to this problem is to use an explicit conversion that
+avoids the construction of an intermediate @code{std::string} object,
+as follows:
+
+@cartouche
+@example
+std::string title;
+.
+.
+.
+title = (const char *)config.lookup("application.window.title");
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+If the assignment is invalid due to a type mismatch, a
+@code{SettingTypeException} is thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{bool @var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{int @var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{long @var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{const long long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{float @var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{const double &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{const char *@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} operator= (@w{const std::string &@var{value}})
+
+These assignment operators allow values of type @i{bool}, @i{int},
+@i{long}, @i{long long}, @i{float}, @i{double}, @i{const char *}, and
+@i{std::string} to be assigned to a setting. In the case of strings,
+the library makes a copy of the passed string @var{value}, so it may
+be subsequently freed or modified by the caller without affecting the
+value of the setting.
+
+If the assignment is invalid due to a type mismatch, a
+@code{SettingTypeException} is thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {Setting &} {operator[]} (@w{int @var{idx}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} {operator[]} (@w{const std::string &@var{name}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} {operator[]} (@w{const char *@var{name}})
+
+A @code{Setting} object may be subscripted with an integer index
+@var{idx} if it is an array or list, or with either a string
+@var{name} or an integer index @var{idx} if it is a group. For example,
+the following code would produce the string @samp{Last Name} when
+applied to the example configuration in @ref{Configuration Files}.
+
+@cartouche
+@example
+Setting& setting = config.lookup("application.misc");
+const char *s = setting["columns"][0];
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+If the setting is not an array, list, or group, a
+@code{SettingTypeException} is thrown. If the subscript (@var{idx}
+or @var{name}) does not refer to a valid element, a
+@code{SettingNotFoundException} is thrown.
+
+Iterating over a group's child settings with an integer index will
+return the settings in the same order that they appear in the
+configuration.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{bool &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{bool &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{int &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{int &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{unsigned int &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{unsigned int &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{long long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{long long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{unsigned long long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{unsigned long long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{unsigned long &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{unsigned long &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{float &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{float &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{double &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{double &@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{const char *&@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{const char *&@var{value}})
+
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{std::string &@var{value}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool lookupValue (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{std::string &@var{value}})
+
+These are convenience methods for looking up the value of a child setting
+with the given @var{name}. If the setting is found and is of an
+appropriate type, the value is stored in @var{value} and the method
+returns @code{true}. Otherwise, @var{value} is left unmodified and the
+method returns @code{false}. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+Storage for @w{@i{const char *}} values is managed by the library and
+released automatically when the setting is destroyed or when its value
+is changed; the string must not be freed by the caller. For safety and
+convenience, always assigning string values to a @code{std::string} is
+suggested.
+
+Since these methods have boolean return values and do not throw
+exceptions, they can be used within boolean logic expressions. The following
+example presents a concise way to look up three values at once and
+perform error handling if any of them are not found or are of the
+wrong type:
+
+@sp 1
+@cartouche
+@example
+int var1;
+double var2;
+const char *var3;
+
+if(setting.lookupValue("var1", var1)
+   && setting.lookupValue("var2", var2)
+   && setting.lookupValue("var3", var3))
+@{
+  // use var1, var2, var3
+@}
+else
+@{
+  // error handling here
+@}
+@end example
+@end cartouche
+
+This approach also takes advantage of the short-circuit evaluation
+rules of C++, e.g., if the first lookup fails (returning @code{false}), the
+remaining lookups are skipped entirely.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {Setting &} add (@w{const std::string &@var{name}}, @w{Setting::Type @var{type}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting {Setting &} add (@w{const char *@var{name}}, @w{Setting::Type @var{type}})
+
+These methods add a new child setting with the given @var{name} and
+@var{type} to the setting, which must be a group. They return a
+reference to the new setting. If the setting already has a child
+setting with the given name, or if the name is invalid, a
+@code{SettingNameException} is thrown. If the setting is not a group,
+a @code{SettingTypeException} is thrown.
+
+Once a setting has been created, neither its name nor type can be
+changed.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {Setting &} add (@w{Setting::Type @var{type}})
+
+This method adds a new element to the setting, which must be of type
+@code{TypeArray} or @code{TypeList}. If the setting is an array which
+currently has zero elements, the @var{type} parameter (which must be
+@code{TypeInt}, @code{TypeInt64}, @code{TypeFloat}, @code{TypeBool},
+or @code{TypeString}) determines the type for the array; otherwise it
+must match the type of the existing elements in the array.
+
+The method returns the new setting on success. If @var{type} is a
+scalar type, the new setting will have a default value of 0, 0.0,
+@code{false}, or @code{NULL}, depending on the type.
+
+The method throws a @code{SettingTypeException} if the setting is not
+an array or list, or if @var{type} is invalid.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting void remove (@w{const std::string &@var{name}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting void remove (@w{const char *@var{name}})
+
+These methods remove the child setting with the given @var{name} from
+the setting, which must be a group. Any child settings of the removed
+setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+If the setting is not a group, a @code{SettingTypeException} is
+thrown.  If the setting does not have a child setting with the given
+name, a @code{SettingNotFoundException} is thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting void remove (@w{unsigned int @var{idx}})
+
+This method removes the child setting at the given index @var{idx} from
+the setting, which must be a group, list, or array. Any child settings
+of the removed setting are recursively destroyed as well.
+
+If the setting is not a group, list, or array, a
+@code{SettingTypeException} is thrown.  If @var{idx} is out of range,
+a @code{SettingNotFoundException} is thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {const char *} getName ()
+
+This method returns the name of the setting, or @code{NULL} if the
+setting has no name. Storage for the returned string is managed by the
+library and released automatically when the setting is destroyed; the
+string must not be freed by the caller. For safety and convenience,
+consider assigning the return value to a @code{std::string}.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {std::string} getPath ()
+
+This method returns the complete dot-separated path to the
+setting. Settings which do not have a name (list and array elements)
+are represented by their index in square brackets.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {Setting &} getParent ()
+
+This method returns the parent setting of the setting. If the setting
+is the root setting, a @code{SettingNotFoundException} is thrown.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting bool isRoot ()
+
+This method returns @code{true} if the setting is the root setting, and
+@code{false} otherwise.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting int getIndex ()
+
+This method returns the index of the setting within its parent
+setting. When applied to the root setting, this method returns -1.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting Setting::Type getType ()
+
+@tindex Setting::Type
+This method returns the type of the setting. The
+@code{Setting::Type} enumeration consists of the following constants:
+@code{TypeInt}, @code{TypeInt64}, @code{TypeFloat}, @code{TypeString},
+@code{TypeBoolean}, @code{TypeArray}, @code{TypeList}, and
+@code{TypeGroup}.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting Setting::Format getFormat ()
+@deftypemethodx Setting void setFormat (@w{Setting::Format @var{format}})
+
+These methods get and set the external format for the setting.
+
+@tindex Setting::Format
+The @var{Setting::Format} enumeration consists of the following
+constants: @code{FormatDefault} and @code{FormatHex}. All settings
+support the @code{FormatDefault} format. The @code{FormatHex} format
+specifies hexadecimal formatting for integer values, and hence only
+applies to settings of type @code{TypeInt} and @code{TypeInt64}. If
+@var{format} is invalid for the given setting, it is ignored.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting bool exists (@w{const std::string &@var{name}})
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool exists (@w{const char *@var{name}})
+
+These methods test if the setting has a child setting with the given
+@var{name}. They return @code{true} if the setting exists, and
+@code{false} otherwise. These methods do not throw exceptions.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting int getLength ()
+
+This method returns the number of settings in a group, or the number of
+elements in a list or array. For other types of settings, it returns
+0.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting bool isGroup ()
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool isArray ()
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool isList ()
+
+These convenience methods test if a setting is of a given type.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting bool isAggregate ()
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool isScalar ()
+@deftypemethodx Setting bool isNumber ()
+
+These convenience methods test if a setting is of an aggregate type (a
+group, array, or list), of a scalar type (integer, 64-bit integer,
+floating point, boolean, or string), and of a number (integer, 64-bit
+integer, or floating point), respectively.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@deftypemethod Setting {unsigned int} getSourceLine ()
+
+This method returns the line number of the configuration file or
+stream at which the setting was parsed. This information is useful for
+reporting application-level errors. If the setting was not read from a
+file or stream, or if the line number is otherwise unavailable, the
+method returns 0.
+
+@end deftypemethod
+
+@node Configuration File Grammar, License, The C++ API, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Configuration File Grammar
+
+Below is the BNF grammar for configuration files. Comments are not part
+of the grammar, and hence are not included here.
+
+@sp 1
+@example
+configuration = setting-list | empty
+
+empty =
+
+setting-list = setting | setting-list setting
+
+setting = name (":" | "=") value ";"
+
+value = scalar-value | array | list | group
+
+value-list = value | value-list "," value
+
+scalar-value = boolean | integer | integer64 | hex | hex64 | float
+               | string
+
+scalar-value-list = scalar-value | scalar-value-list "," scalar-value
+
+array = "[" (scalar-value-list | empty) "]"
+
+list = "(" (value-list | empty) ")"
+
+group = "@{" (setting-list | empty) "@}"
+@end example
+
+@sp 2
+Terminals are defined below as regular expressions:
+@sp 1
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .2 .8
+@item @code{boolean} @tab
+@code{([Tt][Rr][Uu][Ee])|([Ff][Aa][Ll][Ss][Ee])}
+@item @code{string} @tab
+@code{\"([^\"\\]|\\.)*\"}
+@item @code{name} @tab
+@code{[A-Za-z\*][-A-Za-z0-9_\*]*}
+@item @code{integer} @tab
+@code{[-+]?[0-9]+}
+@item @code{integer64} @tab
+@code{[-+]?[0-9]+L(L)?}
+@item @code{hex} @tab
+@code{0[Xx][0-9A-Fa-f]+}
+@item @code{hex64} @tab
+@code{0[Xx][0-9A-Fa-f]+L(L)?}
+@item @code{float} @tab
+@code{([-+]?([0-9]*)?\.[0-9]*([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?)|([-+]([0-9]+)(\.[0-9]*)?[eE][-+]?[0-9]+)}
+@end multitable
+
+@node License, Function Index, Configuration File Grammar, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@appendix License
+
+@include LGPL.texi
+
+@node Function Index, Type Index, License, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Function Index
+
+@printindex fn
+
+@node Type Index, Concept Index, Function Index, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Type Index
+
+@printindex tp
+
+@node Concept Index, , Type Index, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Concept Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@bye
diff --git a/doc/texinfo.tex b/doc/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c93912a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,7086 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2004-11-25.16}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software
+% Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+
+% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
+% in some cases the escape char.
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+  spell-ing spell-ings
+  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+  wide-spread wrap-around
+}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines16
+}%
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+  \def\next{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \spaceisspace
+    #1%
+    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+  }%
+}
+
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+
+% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+  \def\temp{#3}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty
+    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
+    % thus we reuse \temp.
+    \let\temp\finishparsearg
+  \else
+    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+  \fi
+  % Put the space token in:
+  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+}
+
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \next.
+% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+%
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+%	is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+  \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+  % should produce a line of output anyway.
+  %
+  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
+%
+%   \envdef\foo{...}
+%   \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
+
+
+% At runtime, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
+
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+  \else
+    \badenverr
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+  \ifx#1\empty
+    out of any environment%
+  \else
+    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+  \else
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+    \csname E#1\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
+  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above.  But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+  % group, force a page break.
+  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+      \page
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \box\groupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\parseargdef\need{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\parseargdef\need{%
+  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+  \dimen0 = #1\mil
+  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+    %
+    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+    % And a page break here is fine.
+    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+    %
+    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+    %
+    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+    \penalty9999
+    %
+    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+    \kern -#1\mil
+    %
+    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+  \nobreak
+  \kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+    \vss
+    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+    \ifx#1l%
+      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+    \else
+      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+    \fi
+    \null
+  }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
+    \def\righttext{#2}%
+  \else
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
+    \def\righttext{#1}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno
+    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+  \pushthisfilestack
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp
+  \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`~=\other
+  \catcode`^=\other
+  \catcode`_=\other
+  \catcode`|=\other
+  \catcode`<=\other
+  \catcode`>=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other
+  \catcode`-=\other
+}
+
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
+
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \let\next\centerH
+  \else
+    \let\next\centerV
+  \fi
+  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+}
+\def\centerH#1{%
+  {%
+    \hfil\break
+    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+    \line{#1}%
+    \break
+  }%
+}
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+    \else
+      \lispnarrowing = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\noneword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+  \gdef\indent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \indent
+  }%
+  \gdef\noindent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \noindent
+  }%
+  \global\everypar = {%
+    \kern -\parindent
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+  }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global \everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode\underChar = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode\underChar=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
+% otherwise define @\.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \tex
+  \mathunderscore
+  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+  \mathactive
+  $\finishmath
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+  }
+}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\minus{$-$}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
+    .\hfil.\hfil.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+% Texinfo's parsing.
+%
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \iflinks
+     \tryauxfile
+     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+   \closein 1
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+\else
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+%
+\ifpdf
+  \input pdfcolor
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+    \def\imageheight{#3}%
+    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+      \immediate\pdfimage
+    \else
+      \immediate\pdfximage
+    \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+         #1.pdf%
+       \else
+         {#1.pdf}%
+       \fi
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+    \fi}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+    % aren't expanded.
+    \atdummies
+    \normalturnoffactive
+    \pdfdest name{#1} xyz%
+  }}
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
+  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
+  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+  % come from Petr Olsak
+  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+  %
+  % #1 is the section text.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node
+  % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no
+  % corresponding node.  #4 is the page number.
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
+    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+    % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured.
+    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi
+    %
+    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
+      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+      %
+      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissecnum{0}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+      }%
+      \def\thischapnum{0}%
+      \def\thissecnum{0}%
+      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      %
+      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+      % al. a second time, below.
+      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \input \jobname.toc
+      %
+      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+      %
+      % We use the node names as the destinations.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
+      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
+      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+      %
+      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
+      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+      \indexnofonts
+      \turnoffactive
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \endgroup
+  }
+  %
+  \def\makelinks #1,{%
+    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
+    \ifx\params\E
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
+    \else
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
+      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
+      \picknum{#1}%
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
+        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
+      \linkcolor #1%
+      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
+      \endlink
+    \fi
+    \nextmakelinks
+  }
+  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
+  \def\pn#1{%
+    \def\p{#1}%
+    \ifx\p\lbrace
+      \let\nextpn=\ppn
+    \else
+      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
+      \def\first{#1}
+    \fi
+    \nextpn
+  }
+  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
+  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
+  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+        \advance\filenamelength by 1
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+  \else
+    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+  \fi
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
+      \makevalueexpandable
+      \leavevmode\Red
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+    \ifx\first0\adn0
+    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+    \else
+      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+  \def\pdflink#1{%
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\else
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\linkcolor = \relax
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+
+% Default leading.
+\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+}
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{text}%
+  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \def\curfontsize{title}%
+  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{small}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+%
+% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts \rm
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+
+% @b, explicit bold.
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+  \def\frenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+  }
+\catcode`@=\other
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
+  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+             \else\normalunderscore \fi
+             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+            {\_}%
+}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\indicateurl=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+      \else
+        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+%
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+    \unsepspaces
+    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+    \endlink
+  \endgroup}
+\else
+  \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+% 
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+% 
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\frenchspacing #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+% 
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+% 
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+% 
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+% 
+% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+% 
+% 
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+  % installations which never need the symbold don't have to have the
+  % font installed.
+  % 
+  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+  % that to the current nominal size.
+  % 
+  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+  % 
+  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 
+    % bold:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+  \else 
+    % regular:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+  \fi
+  \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+    }$%
+}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+% 
+\ifx\Orb\undefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+    \finishedtitlepagetrue
+    %
+    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+    \let\oldpage = \page
+    \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+	 \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \page
+      \null
+    }%
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+	\finishtitlepage
+    \fi
+    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+    \oldpage
+  \endgroup
+  %
+  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+  \HEADINGSon
+  %
+  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \shortcontents
+    \contents
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \contents
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+  \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+		\let\tt=\authortt}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
+  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+  \finishedtitlepagefalse
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+  \def\temp{\quotation}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+  \else
+    \checkenv\titlepage
+    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make TeX use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{%
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\undefined
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+  \fi
+  \space\number\year}
+\fi
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
+    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
+    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
+    % 
+    \penalty 10001
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\envdef\table{%
+  \let\itemindex\gobble
+  \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{ftable}%
+}
+\envdef\vtable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+    \endgroup
+    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+  \else
+    \let\next\tablex
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+  \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp \endtablez
+}
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+  \itemmax=\tableindent
+  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+  \exdentamount=\tableindent
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \parskip = \smallskipamount
+  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \let\item = \internalBitem
+  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
+
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \itemmax=\itemindent
+  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+  \exdentamount=\itemindent
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \parskip=\smallskipamount
+  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+  \let\item=\itemizeitem
+}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
+  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+  {%
+   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
+   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
+   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
+   % that's the theory.
+   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+   \noindent
+   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+  \flushcr
+}
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% multitable-only commands.
+%
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
+\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+  \def\item{\crcr}%
+  %
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  %
+  \everycr = {%
+    \noalign{%
+      \global\everytab={}%
+      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+      \checkinserts
+      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+      %\filbreak
+	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
+	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup &%
+    \global\advance\colcount by 1
+    \multistrut
+    \vtop{%
+      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+      %
+      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+      % the first one.
+      %
+      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+      % to the width of each template entry.
+      %
+      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+      %
+      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+      \rightskip=0pt
+      \ifnum\colcount=1
+	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
+      \else
+	\ifsetpercent \else
+	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+	\fi
+       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+      \fi
+      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+      % For example:
+      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+      % @item @code{#}
+      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+      % marking characters.
+      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+    }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+  \crcr
+  \egroup % end the \halign
+  \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+  %
+  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
+  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+\fi
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
+%
+\def\makecond#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
+%
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+  \catcode`\@ = \other
+  \catcode`\{ = \other
+  \catcode`\} = \other
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \spaceisspace
+  %
+  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+  \doignorecount = 0
+  %
+  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+  \dodoignore{#1}%
+}
+
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+  \obeylines %
+  %
+  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
+    %
+    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
+    % by itself.
+    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
+    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
+    %
+    % And now expand that command.
+    \obeylines %
+    \doignoretext ^^M%
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
+    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
+    \advance\doignorecount by 1
+    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
+    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+  \fi
+  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
+    \let\next\enddoignore
+  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
+    \advance\doignorecount by -1
+    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+% Finish off ignored text.
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
+%
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{#2}%
+    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+    \ifx\temp\empty
+      \next{}%
+    \else
+      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+  }%
+}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+{
+  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+    \let\value = \expandablevalue
+    % We don't want these characters active, ...
+    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+  }
+}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
+}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+%
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+%
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+%
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+%
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+  % closing the target index.
+  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
+    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+  \fi
+  % redefine \fooindfile:
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+  % redefine \fooindex:
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+%
+\def\indexdummies{%
+  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+  \let\{ = \mylbrace
+  \let\} = \myrbrace
+  %
+  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
+  % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
+  % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
+  % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+  % from whatever follows.
+  %
+  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+  % space.
+  %
+  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+  %
+  \def\definedummyword##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
+  }%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
+  }%
+  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine
+% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses
+% @, this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+  \def\@{@@}%
+  \def\ {@ }%
+  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+  %
+  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
+  \def\definedummyword##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
+  }%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
+  }%
+  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
+% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+  %
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  \definedummyletter{_}%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \definedummyword{AA}%
+  \definedummyword{AE}%
+  \definedummyword{L}%
+  \definedummyword{OE}%
+  \definedummyword{O}%
+  \definedummyword{aa}%
+  \definedummyword{ae}%
+  \definedummyword{l}%
+  \definedummyword{oe}%
+  \definedummyword{o}%
+  \definedummyword{ss}%
+  \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
+  \definedummyword{questiondown}%
+  \definedummyword{ordf}%
+  \definedummyword{ordm}%
+  %
+  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+  \definedummyword{bf}%
+  \definedummyword{gtr}%
+  \definedummyword{hat}%
+  \definedummyword{less}%
+  \definedummyword{sf}%
+  \definedummyword{sl}%
+  \definedummyword{tclose}%
+  \definedummyword{tt}%
+  %
+  \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
+  \definedummyword{TeX}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword{bullet}%
+  \definedummyword{comma}%
+  \definedummyword{copyright}%
+  \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
+  \definedummyword{dots}%
+  \definedummyword{enddots}%
+  \definedummyword{equiv}%
+  \definedummyword{error}%
+  \definedummyword{euro}%
+  \definedummyword{expansion}%
+  \definedummyword{minus}%
+  \definedummyword{pounds}%
+  \definedummyword{point}%
+  \definedummyword{print}%
+  \definedummyword{result}%
+  %
+  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+  \makevalueexpandable
+  %
+  % Normal spaces, not active ones.
+  \unsepspaces
+  %
+  % No macro expansion.
+  \turnoffmacros
+}
+
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+%
+% Better have this without active chars.
+{
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
+    % Control letters and accents.
+    \definedummyletter{!}%
+    \definedummyaccent{"}%
+    \definedummyaccent{'}%
+    \definedummyletter{*}%
+    \definedummyaccent{,}%
+    \definedummyletter{.}%
+    \definedummyletter{/}%
+    \definedummyletter{:}%
+    \definedummyaccent{=}%
+    \definedummyletter{?}%
+    \definedummyaccent{^}%
+    \definedummyaccent{`}%
+    \definedummyaccent{~}%
+    \definedummyword{u}%
+    \definedummyword{v}%
+    \definedummyword{H}%
+    \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
+    \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
+    \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
+    \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
+    \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
+    \definedummyword{dotless}%
+    %
+    % Texinfo font commands.
+    \definedummyword{b}%
+    \definedummyword{i}%
+    \definedummyword{r}%
+    \definedummyword{sc}%
+    \definedummyword{t}%
+    %
+    % Commands that take arguments.
+    \definedummyword{acronym}%
+    \definedummyword{cite}%
+    \definedummyword{code}%
+    \definedummyword{command}%
+    \definedummyword{dfn}%
+    \definedummyword{emph}%
+    \definedummyword{env}%
+    \definedummyword{file}%
+    \definedummyword{kbd}%
+    \definedummyword{key}%
+    \definedummyword{math}%
+    \definedummyword{option}%
+    \definedummyword{samp}%
+    \definedummyword{strong}%
+    \definedummyword{tie}%
+    \definedummyword{uref}%
+    \definedummyword{url}%
+    \definedummyword{var}%
+    \definedummyword{verb}%
+    \definedummyword{w}%
+  }
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+  % Accent commands should become @asis.
+  \def\definedummyaccent##1{%
+    \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
+  }%
+  % We can just ignore other control letters.
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
+  }%
+  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
+  %
+  \def\ { }%
+  \def\@{@}%
+  % how to handle braces?
+  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \def\AA{AA}%
+  \def\AE{AE}%
+  \def\L{L}%
+  \def\OE{OE}%
+  \def\O{O}%
+  \def\aa{aa}%
+  \def\ae{ae}%
+  \def\l{l}%
+  \def\oe{oe}%
+  \def\o{o}%
+  \def\ss{ss}%
+  \def\exclamdown{!}%
+  \def\questiondown{?}%
+  \def\ordf{a}%
+  \def\ordm{o}%
+  %
+  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+  \def\TeX{TeX}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+  \def\bullet{bullet}%
+  \def\comma{,}%
+  \def\copyright{copyright}%
+  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+  \def\dots{...}%
+  \def\enddots{...}%
+  \def\equiv{==}%
+  \def\error{error}%
+  \def\euro{euro}%
+  \def\expansion{==>}%
+  \def\minus{-}%
+  \def\pounds{pounds}%
+  \def\point{.}%
+  \def\print{-|}%
+  \def\result{=>}%
+  %
+  % Don't write macro names.
+  \emptyusermacros
+}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  \iflinks
+  {%
+    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+    %
+    \ifvmode
+      \dosubindsanitize
+    \else
+      \dosubindwrite
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Remember, we are within a group.
+  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  %
+  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+  % get the string to sort by.
+  {\indexnofonts
+   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+  % sorted result.
+  \edef\temp{%
+    \write\writeto{%
+      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+% like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\dosubindsanitize{%
+  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+  \skip0 = \lastskip
+  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+  \count255 = \lastpenalty
+  %
+  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+  \else
+    \vskip-\skip0
+  \fi
+  %
+  \dosubindwrite
+  %
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
+    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
+    % 
+    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
+    %   @vindex index-whatever
+    %   Description.
+    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+    % and the "Description." paragraph.
+    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
+  \else
+    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
+  \fi
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    \putwordIndexNonexistent
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  %
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+  \penalty 0
+  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  %
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+}}
+
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+%	\def\entry#1#2{...
+% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+%
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
+\def\entry{%
+  \begingroup
+    %
+    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+    % affect previous text.
+    \par
+    %
+    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+    \parfillskip = 0in
+    %
+    % No extra space above this paragraph.
+    \parskip = 0in
+    %
+    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+    %
+    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+    %
+    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+    \hangindent = 2em
+    %
+    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+    % with blank space.
+    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+    %
+    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+    % columns.
+    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+    %
+    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+    \afterassignment\doentry
+    \let\temp =
+}
+\def\doentry{%
+    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+      \noindent
+      \aftergroup\finishentry
+      % And now comes the text of the entry.
+}
+\def\finishentry#1{%
+    % #1 is the page number.
+    %
+    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+    \def\tempb{#1}%
+    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+    \ifx\tempc\tempd
+      \ %
+    \else
+      %
+      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+      \hfil\penalty50
+      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+      %
+      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+      % \hbox ensues.
+      \ifpdf
+	\pdfgettoks#1.%
+	\ \the\toksA
+      \else
+	\ #1%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \par
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+  \parfillskip=0in
+  \parskip=0in
+  \hangindent=1in
+  \hangafter=1
+  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \else
+    #2
+  \fi
+  \par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {%
+    %
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
+    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+      % Unvbox the main output page.
+      \unvbox\PAGE
+      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+    }%
+  }%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+%
+% All done with double columns.
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+%
+% Called at the end of the double column material.
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+%
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
+\def\appendixletter{%
+  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
+  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+  \else\char\the\appendixno
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+  \absseclevel=#2
+  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+    \absseclevel = 0
+  \else
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+      \absseclevel = 3
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  % The heading type:
+  \def\headtype{#1}%
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
+      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Check for appendix sections:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+    \else
+      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+      \fi\fi
+    \fi
+    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+      \def\headtype{U}%
+    \else
+      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  % Now print the heading:
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifcase\absseclevel
+	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if \headtype A%
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
+      \or \seczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+  % as an @include file.
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\chapno by 1
+  %
+  % Used for \float.
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % Write the actual heading.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+  \message{\appendixnum}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+  %
+  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+  % to be executed, not expanded).
+  %
+  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+  % the toc entries.)
+  \toks0 = {#1}%
+  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+  \unnmhead0{#1}%
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\let\top\unnumbered
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{%
+  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
+
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
+  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+% Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    %
+    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
+    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
+    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+    \def\temptype{#2}%
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+      \def\thischapter{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \xdef\thischapter{}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
+      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
+      %
+      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
+                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{numchap}%
+      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
+                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
+    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+    %
+    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+    \donoderef{#2}%
+    %
+    % Typeset the actual heading.
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerparameters{%
+  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+  \leftskip = \rightskip
+  \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
+
+
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
+%
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+%
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+\def\CHAPFopen{%
+  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
+
+
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+% section number.
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Insert space above the heading.
+    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
+    %
+    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+    \def\temptype{#3}%
+    %
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unn}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+      % and don't redefine \thissection.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{num}%
+      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+    %
+    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+    % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
+    \donoderef{#3}%
+    %
+    % Output the actual section heading.
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #1}%
+  }%
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+  % Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+  %
+  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+  % was followed by glue.
+  \nobreak
+  %
+  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+  % discardable item.)
+  \vskip-\parskip
+  % 
+  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
+  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
+  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
+  % 
+  %   @section sec-whatever
+  %   @deffn def-whatever
+  \penalty 10001
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
+%
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
+%
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+    \iftocfileopened\else
+      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+    \fi
+    %
+    \iflinks
+      \toks0 = {#2}%
+      \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}%
+      \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}%
+                               {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+      \temp
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+  % `1', and two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+  \contentsalignmacro
+  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+  %
+  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+  \def\thischapter{}%
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+  %
+  \savepageno = \pageno
+  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+    \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+    % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+    % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+    %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+    \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    %
+    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \fi
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \pdfmakeoutlines
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+    %
+    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+    \secfonts
+    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+    \rm
+    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  %
+  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
+  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+  % there are before deciding ...
+  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+%
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+%
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{%
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\envdef\tex{%
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode `\+=\other
+  \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\|=\other
+  \catcode `\<=\other
+  \catcode `\>=\other
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\/=\ptexslash
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
+
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
+      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+      % or better ...
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+  \startsavinginserts
+  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+  \cartouter=\hsize
+  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
+				% side, and for 6pt waste from
+				% each corner char, and rule thickness
+  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+  \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+  \vbox\bgroup
+      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+      \carttop
+      \hbox\bgroup
+	  \hskip\lskip
+	  \vrule\kern3pt
+	  \vbox\bgroup
+	      \kern3pt
+	      \hsize=\cartinner
+	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
+	      \lineskip=\normlskip
+	      \parskip=\normpskip
+	      \vskip -\parskip
+	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+}
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+              \ifhmode\par\fi
+	      \kern3pt
+	  \egroup
+	  \kern3pt\vrule
+	  \hskip\rskip
+      \egroup
+      \cartbot
+  \egroup
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+  \fi
+  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+}
+
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+%
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+  \else
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it by one command:
+\def\makedispenv #1#2{
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+}
+
+% Define two synonyms:
+\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
+  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
+  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
+%
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+%
+\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\makedispenv {display}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\makedispenv{format}{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\envdef\flushright{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
+%
+\envdef\quotation{%
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \parindent=0pt
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+  \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
+
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Equotation{%
+  \par
+  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+    % indent a bit.
+    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+  \fi
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    {\bf #1: }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+%
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
+\endgroup
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+  \catcode`\`=\active
+  \tabeightspaces
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabexpand{%
+    \catcode`\^^I=\active
+    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+    }%
+  }
+\endgroup
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \tt
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+  \catcode`\`=\active
+  \tabexpand
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+\endgroup
+%
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \setupverbatim
+    \input #1
+    \afterenvbreak
+  }%
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+%
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+    \scanexp\copyingtext
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+    \medbreak
+  \else
+    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+    % 
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
+    %
+    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+    % But do insert the glue.
+    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+  \fi
+  %
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+  \checkenv#1%
+  %
+  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+  % It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
+  %
+  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+}
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
+
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
+%
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    % call \deffnheader:
+    #1#2 \endheader
+    % common ending:
+    \interlinepenalty = 10000
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+    \endgraf
+    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
+    \checkparencounts
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
+%
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+  \envdef#1{%
+    \startdefun
+    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+  }%
+  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+  \def#3%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped functions:
+
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed functions:
+
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed variables:
+
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped variables:
+
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
+
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+
+%%% Type:
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
+%
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+%
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+  %
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+  % The continuations:
+  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the type name to the right margin.
+  \noindent
+  \hbox to 0pt{%
+    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+    \kern\leftskip
+    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {%
+    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
+    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
+    \df \tt
+    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+    #3% output function name
+  }%
+  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+  %
+  \boldbrax
+  % arguments will be output next, if any.
+}
+
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+  % tt for the names.
+  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+  %
+  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
+  \let\var=\ttslanted
+  #1%
+  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+}
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+  \activeparens
+  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+  \global\let& = \&
+
+  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+  \ifampseen
+    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+    % otherwise use the default font.
+    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+  \else
+    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+    \sf
+  \fi
+}
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+  \ifampseen
+    \ifnum\parencount=1
+      #1%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+
+\def\opnr{%
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+  {\parenfont(}%
+  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
+}
+\def\clnr{%
+  {\parenfont)}%
+  \infirstlevel \sl
+  \global\advance\parencount by -1
+}
+
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+  {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+  {\bf]}%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
+
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+\def\badparencount{%
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
+  \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
+  \global\brackcount=0
+}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+  \newwrite\macscribble
+  \def\scantokens#1{%
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+    \input \jobname.tmp
+  }
+\fi
+
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \newlinechar`\^^M
+    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
+    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
+    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
+    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+    % ... and \example
+    \spaceisspace
+    %
+    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+    %
+    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+    %							--kasal, 29nov03
+    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
+                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% Utility routines.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+% 
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\let
+  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname#2\endcsname
+}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\scanctxt{%
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash
+}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+    \begingroup
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\do\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \next}
+
+% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% expanded by \write.
+\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
+  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
+% arguments (if present).  Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
+% is the best we can do for now.  makeinfo does not expand macros in the
+% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
+% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
+% 
+% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+% to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
+% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+% 
+\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
+  \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
+  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+  }%
+  \next
+}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
+%                 or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+%                 empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
+  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+  \iflinks
+    {%
+      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+      \turnoffactive
+      \otherbackslash
+      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+      }%
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Make link in pdf output.
+  \ifpdf
+    \leavevmode
+    \getfilename{#4}%
+    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
+     \else
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    \linkcolor
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
+  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+  {%
+    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+  }%
+  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+      \refx{#1-snt}%
+    \else
+      \printedrefname
+    \fi
+    %
+    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % "in MANUALNAME".
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    %
+    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \else
+      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+      {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+      }%
+      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+      %
+      % But we always want a comma and a space:
+      ,\space
+      %
+      % output the `page 3'.
+      \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
+
+% Things referred to by \setref.
+%
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+%
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \thisrefX
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
+  %
+  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
+    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+    %
+    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+    \else
+      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+    % for later use in \listoffloats.
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \readauxfile
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  %
+  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
+  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
+  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\@=0
+  %
+  \input \jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \dofootnote
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \hsize=\pagewidth
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  %
+  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
+  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+  \let\noindent = \relax
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
+  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+  \everypar = {\hang}%
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
+
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
+%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+    \let\insert\saveinsert
+  \else
+    \let\checkinserts\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
+%
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \afterassignment\next
+  % swallow the left brace
+  \let\temp =
+}
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+    {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
+  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+    \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
+
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+\closein 1
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
+  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \imagevmodetrue
+    \nobreak\bigskip
+    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+    % above and below.
+    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+    \nobreak
+    \line\bgroup\hss
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Output the image.
+  \ifpdf
+    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \else
+    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \let\thiscaption=\empty
+  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+  %
+  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    \def\floattype{#1}%
+    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+    %
+    \ifx\floattype\empty
+      \let\safefloattype=\empty
+    \else
+      {%
+        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+        \indexnofonts
+        \turnoffactive
+        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
+      %
+      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+      \global\advance\floatno by 1
+      %
+      {%
+        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
+        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+        % lists of floats.
+        %
+        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+    \vskip\parskip
+    %
+    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+    \let\floatident = \empty
+    %
+    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+    %
+    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+      \fi
+      % the number.
+      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+    \let\captionline = \floatident
+    %
+    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+      \fi
+      %
+      % caption text.
+      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+      \vskip.5\parskip
+      \captionline
+      %
+      % Space below caption.
+      \vskip\parskip
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
+    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
+      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+      {%
+        \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+	\scanexp{%
+	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+	      \thiscaption
+	    \else
+	      \thisshortcaption
+	    \fi
+	  }%
+	}%
+        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \egroup  % end of \vtop
+  %
+  % place the captured inserts
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+      %
+      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+  \fi
+  \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
+% \thissection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+  {%
+    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+    \ifhavexrefs
+      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \begingroup
+      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
+      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
+  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+  % in pdf output.
+  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+  \writeentry
+}}
+
+\message{localization,}
+% and i18n.
+
+% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
+% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
+% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
+% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+%
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
+  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+    % Read the file if it exists.
+    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+    \ifeof 1
+      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \else
+      \input txi-#1.tex
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+}
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
+should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+
+% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
+% likely, but for now just recognize it.
+\let\documentencoding = \comment
+
+
+% Page size parameters.
+%
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
+% physical page width.
+%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+  \fi
+  %
+  \setleading{\textleading}
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+                    {11in}{8.5in}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+                    {9.25in}{7in}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
+  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
+  % your texinfo source file like this:
+  % @tex
+  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+  % @end tex
+  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 5mm
+}}
+
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+  \textleading = 12.5pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+                    {210mm}{148mm}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+  \tolerance = 800
+  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 2mm
+  \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{\textleading}%
+  %
+  \dimen0 = #1
+  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+  %
+  \dimen2 = \hsize
+  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\catcode`\$=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+ @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+}
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
+
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{%
+  @let"=@normaldoublequote
+  @let\=@realbackslash
+  @let~=@normaltilde
+  @let^=@normalcaret
+  @let_=@normalunderscore
+  @let|=@normalverticalbar
+  @let<=@normalless
+  @let>=@normalgreater
+  @let+=@normalplus
+  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+  @unsepspaces
+}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
+% effect.)
+%
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active
+  @catcode`@_=@active
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+@catcode`@& = @other
+@catcode`@# = @other
+@catcode`@% = @other
+
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
+
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
+@ignore
+   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
+@end ignore